WO2022033577A1 - Communication method and apparatus - Google Patents

Communication method and apparatus Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2022033577A1
WO2022033577A1 PCT/CN2021/112454 CN2021112454W WO2022033577A1 WO 2022033577 A1 WO2022033577 A1 WO 2022033577A1 CN 2021112454 W CN2021112454 W CN 2021112454W WO 2022033577 A1 WO2022033577 A1 WO 2022033577A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
prg
pusch
srs
information
frequency hopping
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2021/112454
Other languages
French (fr)
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
刘显达
纪刘榴
王明哲
Original Assignee
华为技术有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 华为技术有限公司 filed Critical 华为技术有限公司
Publication of WO2022033577A1 publication Critical patent/WO2022033577A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04BTRANSMISSION
    • H04B7/00Radio transmission systems, i.e. using radiation field
    • H04B7/02Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas
    • H04B7/04Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas
    • H04B7/0413MIMO systems
    • H04B7/0456Selection of precoding matrices or codebooks, e.g. using matrices antenna weighting
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04BTRANSMISSION
    • H04B7/00Radio transmission systems, i.e. using radiation field
    • H04B7/02Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas
    • H04B7/04Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas
    • H04B7/06Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas at the transmitting station
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04BTRANSMISSION
    • H04B7/00Radio transmission systems, i.e. using radiation field
    • H04B7/02Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas
    • H04B7/04Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas
    • H04B7/06Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas at the transmitting station
    • H04B7/0613Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas at the transmitting station using simultaneous transmission
    • H04B7/0615Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas at the transmitting station using simultaneous transmission of weighted versions of same signal
    • H04B7/0617Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas at the transmitting station using simultaneous transmission of weighted versions of same signal for beam forming
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04LTRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L5/00Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04LTRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L5/00Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
    • H04L5/003Arrangements for allocating sub-channels of the transmission path
    • H04L5/0048Allocation of pilot signals, i.e. of signals known to the receiver
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04LTRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L5/00Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
    • H04L5/003Arrangements for allocating sub-channels of the transmission path
    • H04L5/0053Allocation of signaling, i.e. of overhead other than pilot signals
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W72/00Local resource management
    • H04W72/04Wireless resource allocation
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W72/00Local resource management
    • H04W72/04Wireless resource allocation
    • H04W72/044Wireless resource allocation based on the type of the allocated resource
    • H04W72/0453Resources in frequency domain, e.g. a carrier in FDMA
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W72/00Local resource management
    • H04W72/12Wireless traffic scheduling
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W72/00Local resource management
    • H04W72/20Control channels or signalling for resource management
    • H04W72/23Control channels or signalling for resource management in the downlink direction of a wireless link, i.e. towards a terminal

Definitions

  • the present application relates to the field of communication technologies, and in particular, to a communication method and apparatus.
  • the physical uplink shared channel (PUSCH) transmission modes supported in the new radio interface (NR) include a codebook-based transmission mode and a non-codebook-based transmission mode.
  • the codebook-based transmission mode means that the base station indicates the transmission precoding indicator (transmmit precoding Matrix indicator, TPMI) of the PUSCH from a predefined codebook, and the UE sends the PUSCH according to the indicated TPMI.
  • the non-codebook-based transmission mode utilizes the reciprocity of the uplink and downlink channels, and the terminal device determines the beamforming mode, such as precoding, used to transmit the uplink signal (eg, PUSCH) according to the downlink channel measurement result.
  • the specific process of the non-codebook-based transmission mode is as follows: the base station sends a downlink reference signal or downlink channel to a user equipment (UE), and the UE can receive a downlink reference signal or a downlink channel according to the received data.
  • the obtained downlink signal or downlink channel obtains the channel covariance matrix, and the channel covariance matrix is used to obtain the precoding of the adapted channel (for example, it may be an eigenvalue vector obtained by singular value decomposition (SVD)).
  • the UE transmits a sounding reference signal (SRS) using corresponding precoding on different SRS resources respectively.
  • SRS sounding reference signal
  • the base station measures the SRS sent on different SRS resources, selects some SRS resources from multiple SRS resources, and indicates the selected SRS resources to the UE, and the UE sends the PUSCH to the base station according to the precoding corresponding to the indicated SRS resources.
  • PUSCH corresponds to multiple precoding resource groups (precoding resource groups, PRGs), and one PRG uses one precoding.
  • the precoding of each PRG can be indicated by an SRI field.
  • the scheduling indication of PUSCH 1 includes two SRS resource indication (SRS resource indication, SRI) fields, that is, PUSCH corresponds to two PRGs, the SRI-1 field is used to indicate the precoding of PRG 1, and the SRI-2 field is used to indicate the precoding of PRG 1.
  • SRS resource indication SRI
  • the field is used to indicate the precoding of PRG 2;
  • the scheduling indication DCI of PUSCH 2 includes four SRI fields, that is, the PUSCH corresponds to four PRGs, the SRI-1 field corresponds to PRG1, the SRI-2 field corresponds to PRG2, and the SRI-3 field corresponds to PRG3 , the SRI-4 field corresponds to PRG4, that is, the SRI-1 field is used to indicate the precoding of PRG1, the SRI-2 field is used to indicate the precoding of PRG2, the SRI-3 field is used to indicate the precoding of PRG3, and the SRI-4 field is used to indicate the precoding of PRG3. to indicate precoding of PRG4.
  • the SRI field is carried in downlink control information (downlink control information, DCI), and increasing the DCI overhead will seriously affect the downlink coverage performance of the network.
  • DCI downlink control information
  • the present application provides a communication method and apparatus for improving PUSCH transmission performance and reducing signaling overhead.
  • the present application provides a communication method.
  • the method includes a first communication device receiving first information and second information from a second communication device, and determining a PUSCH according to the first information and the second information.
  • N PRGs corresponding to the scheduling bandwidth, the PUSCH is sent according to the N PRGs, where the N is a positive integer, the first information is used to indicate the frequency hopping bandwidth of the SRS resource, and the second information is used to An index indicating part or all of the SRS resources in the SRS resources.
  • the first communication device in the method may be a terminal device, or a module in the terminal device, such as a chip.
  • the N PRGs corresponding to the scheduling bandwidth of the PUSCH are determined according to the frequency hopping bandwidth of the SRS resource and the index of the SRS resource indicated by the second information.
  • the determined PRG can be more accurate, so that the DCI overhead can be reduced.
  • each PRG in the N PRGs corresponds to a frequency hopping bandwidth of the SRS resource.
  • the PRB with the lowest frequency in the first PRG and the PRB with the highest frequency in the second PRG respectively correspond to the SRS resources different frequency hopping bandwidths
  • the PRB with the lowest frequency in the first PRG and the PRB with the highest frequency in the second PRG are two adjacent PRBs on the scheduling bandwidth of the PUSCH.
  • the PRB with the highest frequency in the first PRG and the PRB with the lowest frequency in the second PRG respectively correspond to different frequency hopping bandwidths of the SRS resource
  • the PRB with the highest frequency in the first PRG and the PRB with the lowest frequency in the second PRG respectively correspond to different frequency hopping bandwidths of the SRS resource.
  • the PRBs are two adjacent PRBs on the scheduling bandwidth of the PUSCH.
  • the third PRG and the fourth PRG correspond to the same one of the SRS resources A frequency hopping bandwidth, and the indexes of the third PRG and the fourth PRG corresponding to the SRS resources indicated by the second information are different.
  • the first communication device determines a first frequency hopping bandwidth of the SRS resource corresponding to the fifth PRG, and sends the fifth PRG on the fifth PRG.
  • the beamforming mode of the PUSCH is the beamforming mode for sending the first SRS
  • the beamforming mode for sending the first SRS is the beamforming mode used for sending the SRS on the first frequency hopping bandwidth of the first SRS resource
  • the first SRS is carried on the first frequency hopping bandwidth of the first SRS resource
  • the index of the first SRS resource is the resource index of part or all of the SRS indicated by the second information.
  • the beamforming mode for sending PUSCH on different PRGs is determined according to the beamforming mode used for sending SRS on the corresponding SRS resources and the corresponding frequency hopping bandwidth. In this way, the beamforming mode of different PRGs can be ensured.
  • the methods are different, and are more suitable for the channel of uplink transmission, so that the transmission performance of the PUSCH can be improved.
  • the transmission of the first SRS is an SRS transmission with the smallest time domain interval from sending the second information.
  • the determined beamforming manner of each PRG is as optimal as possible.
  • the second information includes a sounding reference signal indication (sounding reference signal indication, SRI).
  • SRI sounding reference signal indication
  • the N satisfies H ⁇ K/L
  • the H is the number of the SRS resources indicated by the second indication information
  • the The K is the number of frequency hopping bandwidths of the SRS resources corresponding to the scheduling bandwidth of the PUSCH
  • the H, K and L are all positive integers.
  • the present application provides a communication method.
  • the method includes a first communication device receiving third information from a second communication device, and determining M PRGs corresponding to the scheduling bandwidth of the PUSCH according to the third information,
  • the PUSCH is sent according to the M PRGs, where M is a positive integer, and the third information is used to indicate the frequency hopping bandwidth and frequency hopping times of the PUSCH.
  • M PRGs corresponding to the scheduling bandwidth of the PUSCH can be determined according to the third information. In this way, the beamforming mode of each PRG can be ensured to be optimal, and the PUSCH can obtain frequency diversity gain.
  • each PRG in the M PRGs corresponds to a frequency hopping bandwidth of the PUSCH.
  • the first communication device may further receive first information from the second communication device, where the first information is used for hopping the SRS resources frequency bandwidth;
  • the first communication apparatus determines M PRGs corresponding to the scheduling bandwidth of the PUSCH according to the third information and the first information, wherein each PRG in the M PRGs A frequency hopping bandwidth corresponding to the SRS resource.
  • the first communication device may further receive first information and second information from the second communication device, where the first information is used to indicate the frequency hopping bandwidth of the SRS resource, so The second information is used to indicate the index of some or all of the SRS resources in the SRS resources;
  • the first communication apparatus determines M PRGs corresponding to the scheduling bandwidth of the PUSCH according to the third information, the first information and the second information, wherein the M PRGs Each PRG in the PRG corresponds to a frequency hopping bandwidth of the SRS resource.
  • the PRB with the lowest frequency in the first PRG and the PRB with the highest frequency in the second PRG respectively correspond to different frequency hopping bandwidths of the SRS resource; wherein, the first PRG and the second PRG PRGs are two adjacent PRGs in the frequency domain among the M PRGs, and the PRB with the lowest frequency in the first PRG and the PRB with the highest frequency in the second PRG are the same frequency hopping of the scheduling bandwidth of the PUSCH Two PRBs that are adjacent in bandwidth.
  • the PRB with the highest frequency in the first PRG and the PRB with the lowest frequency in the second PRG respectively correspond to different frequency hopping bandwidths of the SRS resource;
  • PRGs are two adjacent PRGs in the frequency domain among the M PRGs, and the PRB with the highest frequency in the first PRG and the PRB with the lowest frequency in the second PRG are the same frequency hopping of the scheduling bandwidth of the PUSCH Two PRBs that are adjacent in bandwidth.
  • the third PRG and the fourth PRG correspond to the same frequency hopping bandwidth of the SRS resource, and the third PRG and the fourth PRG correspond to the SRS resource indicated by the second information
  • the indexes of are different; wherein, the third PRG and the fourth PRG are any two PRGs in the M PRGs.
  • the first communication apparatus determines a first frequency hopping bandwidth of the SRS resource corresponding to the fifth PRG, and the beamforming manner for sending the PUSCH on the fifth PRG is to send The beamforming mode of the first SRS, wherein the fifth PRG is any one of the M PRGs; the first SRS is carried on the first frequency hopping bandwidth of the first SRS resource, and the first The resource index of the SRS is the resource index of part or all of the SRS indicated by the second information.
  • the transmission of the first SRS is an SRS transmission with the smallest time domain interval from sending the second information.
  • the second information includes SRI.
  • the number of transmission layers of the PUSCH is equal to L
  • the number of PRGs corresponding to the frequency hopping bandwidth of the PUSCH satisfies H ⁇ P/L
  • the H is the indication of the second indication information
  • the present application provides a communication method.
  • the method includes a second communication device determining first information and second information, and sending the first information and the second information to the first communication device, the first information and the second information being sent to the first communication device.
  • the information is used to indicate the frequency hopping bandwidth of the SRS resource
  • the second information is used to indicate the index of some or all of the SRS resources in the SRS resource; the first information and the second information are used to determine the scheduling bandwidth of the PUSCH
  • the second communication device in the method may be a network device, or a module in the network device, such as a chip.
  • each PRG in the N PRGs corresponds to a frequency hopping bandwidth of the SRS resource.
  • the PRB with the lowest frequency in the first PRG and the PRB with the highest frequency in the second PRG respectively correspond to different frequency hopping bandwidths of the SRS resource; wherein, the first PRG and the second PRG PRGs are two adjacent PRGs in the frequency domain among the N PRGs, and the PRB with the lowest frequency in the first PRG and the PRB with the highest frequency in the second PRG are the two adjacent PRGs in the scheduling bandwidth of the PUSCH. PRBs.
  • the PRB with the highest frequency in the first PRG and the PRB with the lowest frequency in the second PRG respectively correspond to different frequency hopping bandwidths of the SRS resource;
  • PRGs are two adjacent PRGs in the frequency domain in the N PRGs, and the PRB with the highest frequency in the first PRG and the PRB with the lowest frequency in the second PRG are the two adjacent PRGs in the scheduling bandwidth of the PUSCH PRBs.
  • the third PRG and the fourth PRG correspond to the same frequency hopping bandwidth of the SRS resource, and the third PRG and the fourth PRG correspond to the SRS resource indicated by the second information
  • the indexes of are different; wherein, the third PRG and the fourth PRG are any two PRGs in the N PRGs.
  • the second information includes SRI.
  • the second communication apparatus sends the number of transmission layers L of the PUSCH to the first communication apparatus; wherein, the N satisfies H ⁇ K/L, and the H is the The number of the SRS resources indicated by the second indication information, the K is the number of frequency hopping bandwidths of the SRS resources corresponding to the scheduling bandwidth of the PUSCH, and the H, K and L are all positive integers.
  • the present application provides a communication method, the method includes the second communication device determining third information, and sending the third information to the first communication device, where the third information is used to indicate the frequency hopping bandwidth of the PUSCH and the number of frequency hopping; the third information is used by the first communication apparatus to determine M PRGs corresponding to the scheduling bandwidth of the PUSCH, where M is a positive integer.
  • each PRG in the M PRGs corresponds to a frequency hopping bandwidth of the PUSCH.
  • the second communication apparatus determines first information, where the first information is used to indicate the frequency hopping bandwidth of the sounding reference signal SRS resource; the second communication apparatus sends to the first communication apparatus
  • the first information, the first information and the third information are used by the first communication apparatus to determine M PRGs corresponding to the scheduling bandwidth of the PUSCH, wherein each PRG in the M PRGs A frequency hopping bandwidth corresponding to the SRS resource.
  • the second communication apparatus determines first information and second information, where the first information is used to indicate a frequency hopping bandwidth of a sounding reference signal SRS resource, and the second information is used to indicate the The index of part or all of the SRS resources in the SRS resources; the second communication device sends the first information and the second information to the first communication device, the first information, the second information and the The third information is used by the first communication apparatus to determine M PRGs corresponding to the scheduling bandwidth of the PUSCH, wherein each PRG in the M PRGs corresponds to a frequency hopping bandwidth of the SRS resource.
  • the PRB with the lowest frequency in the first PRG and the PRB with the highest frequency in the second PRG respectively correspond to different frequency hopping bandwidths of the SRS resource; wherein, the first PRG and the second PRG PRGs are two adjacent PRGs in the frequency domain among the M PRGs, and the PRB with the lowest frequency in the first PRG and the PRB with the highest frequency in the second PRG are the same frequency hopping of the scheduling bandwidth of the PUSCH Two PRBs that are adjacent in bandwidth.
  • the PRB with the highest frequency in the first PRG and the PRB with the lowest frequency in the second PRG respectively correspond to different frequency hopping bandwidths of the SRS resource;
  • PRGs are two adjacent PRGs in the frequency domain among the M PRGs, and the PRB with the highest frequency in the first PRG and the PRB with the lowest frequency in the second PRG are the same frequency hopping of the scheduling bandwidth of the PUSCH Two PRBs that are adjacent in bandwidth.
  • the third PRG and the fourth PRG correspond to the same frequency hopping bandwidth of the SRS resource, and the third PRG and the fourth PRG correspond to the SRS resource indicated by the second information
  • the indexes of are different; wherein, the third PRG and the fourth PRG are any two PRGs in the M PRGs.
  • the second information includes SRI.
  • the second communication apparatus sends the number of transmission layers L of the PUSCH to the first communication apparatus; wherein, the number of PRGs corresponding to the frequency hopping bandwidth of the PUSCH satisfies H ⁇ P /L, the H is the number of the SRS resources indicated by the second indication information, the P is the number of frequency hopping bandwidths of the SRS resources corresponding to the frequency hopping bandwidth of the PUSCH, the H, P and L is a positive integer.
  • the present application provides a communication device, the communication device having the function of realizing the first communication device in the first aspect above, or being used to realize the function of the first communication device in the second aspect, or being used to realize The function of the second communication device in the above third aspect, or for implementing the function of the second communication device in the above fourth aspect.
  • This function can be implemented by hardware or by executing corresponding software by hardware.
  • the hardware or software includes one or more units or modules corresponding to the above functions.
  • the communication apparatus may be a terminal device, or a module usable in the terminal device, such as a chip or a chip system or a circuit.
  • the communication apparatus may include a transceiver and a processor.
  • the processor may be configured to support the communication apparatus to perform the corresponding functions of the terminal equipment shown above, and the transceiver is configured to support communication between the communication apparatus and network equipment, other terminal equipment, and the like.
  • the transceiver may be an independent receiver, an independent transmitter, a transceiver with integrated transceiver functions, or an interface circuit.
  • the communication device may further include a memory, which may be coupled to the processor, and stores necessary program instructions and data for the communication device.
  • the transceiver is configured to receive first information and second information from the second communication device, where the first information is used to indicate the frequency hopping bandwidth of the sounding reference signal SRS resource, and the second information is used to indicate the The index of some or all of the SRS resources in the SRS resources; the processor is configured to determine, according to the first information and the second information, N precoding resource block groups PRG corresponding to the scheduling bandwidth of the physical uplink shared channel PUSCH, where the The N is a positive integer; the transceiver is further configured to send the PUSCH according to the N PRGs.
  • each PRG in the N PRGs corresponds to a frequency hopping bandwidth of the SRS resource.
  • the PRB with the lowest frequency in the first PRG and the PRB with the highest frequency in the second PRG respectively correspond to different frequency hopping bandwidths of the SRS resource; wherein, the first PRG and the second PRG PRGs are two adjacent PRGs in the frequency domain among the N PRGs, and the PRB with the lowest frequency in the first PRG and the PRB with the highest frequency in the second PRG are the two adjacent PRGs in the scheduling bandwidth of the PUSCH. PRBs.
  • the PRB with the highest frequency in the first PRG and the PRB with the lowest frequency in the second PRG respectively correspond to different frequency hopping bandwidths of the SRS resource;
  • PRGs are two adjacent PRGs in the frequency domain in the N PRGs, and the PRB with the highest frequency in the first PRG and the PRB with the lowest frequency in the second PRG are the two adjacent PRGs in the scheduling bandwidth of the PUSCH PRBs.
  • the third PRG and the fourth PRG correspond to the same frequency hopping bandwidth of the SRS resource, and the third PRG and the fourth PRG correspond to the SRS resource indicated by the second information
  • the indexes of are different; wherein, the third PRG and the fourth PRG are any two PRGs in the N PRGs.
  • the processor is further configured to determine the first frequency hopping bandwidth of the SRS resource corresponding to the fifth PRG, and the beamforming manner for sending the PUSCH on the fifth PRG is to send the The beamforming mode of the first SRS, wherein the fifth PRG is any one of the N PRGs; the first SRS is carried on the first frequency hopping bandwidth of the first SRS resource, and the first The index of the SRS resource is the resource index of part or all of the SRS indicated by the second information.
  • the transmission of the first SRS is an SRS transmission with the smallest time domain interval from sending the second information.
  • the second information includes SRI.
  • the N satisfies H ⁇ K/L
  • the H is the number of the SRS resources indicated by the second indication information
  • the The K is the number of frequency hopping bandwidths of the SRS resources corresponding to the scheduling bandwidth of the PUSCH
  • the H, K and L are all positive integers.
  • the transceiver is configured to receive third information from the second communication device, where the third information is used to indicate the frequency hopping bandwidth and frequency hopping times of the physical uplink shared channel PUSCH; the processor is configured to information, determine M precoding resource block groups PRGs corresponding to the scheduling bandwidth of the PUSCH, and send the PUSCH according to the M PRGs, where M is a positive integer.
  • each PRG in the M PRGs corresponds to a frequency hopping bandwidth of the PUSCH.
  • the transceiver is further configured to receive first information from the second communication apparatus, where the first information is used to indicate a frequency hopping bandwidth of the sounding reference signal SRS resource; the The processor is further configured to determine, according to the third information and the first information, M PRGs corresponding to the scheduling bandwidth of the PUSCH, wherein each PRG in the M PRGs corresponds to the SRS resource A frequency hopping bandwidth.
  • the transceiver is further configured to receive first information and second information from the second communication apparatus, where the first information is used to indicate frequency hopping of sounding reference signal SRS resources bandwidth, the second information is used to indicate indexes of some or all of the SRS resources in the SRS resources; the processor is further configured to, according to the third information, the first information and the second information, M PRGs corresponding to the scheduling bandwidth of the PUSCH are determined, wherein each PRG in the M PRGs corresponds to a frequency hopping bandwidth of the SRS resource.
  • the PRB with the lowest frequency in the first PRG and the PRB with the highest frequency in the second PRG respectively correspond to different frequency hopping bandwidths of the SRS resource; wherein, the first PRG and the second PRG PRGs are two adjacent PRGs in the frequency domain among the M PRGs, and the PRB with the lowest frequency in the first PRG and the PRB with the highest frequency in the second PRG are the same frequency hopping of the scheduling bandwidth of the PUSCH Two PRBs that are adjacent in bandwidth.
  • the PRB with the highest frequency in the first PRG and the PRB with the lowest frequency in the second PRG respectively correspond to different frequency hopping bandwidths of the SRS resource;
  • PRGs are two adjacent PRGs in the frequency domain among the M PRGs, and the PRB with the highest frequency in the first PRG and the PRB with the lowest frequency in the second PRG are the same frequency hopping of the scheduling bandwidth of the PUSCH Two PRBs that are adjacent in bandwidth.
  • the third PRG and the fourth PRG correspond to the same frequency hopping bandwidth of the SRS resource, and the third PRG and the fourth PRG correspond to the SRS resource indicated by the second information
  • the indexes of are different; wherein, the third PRG and the fourth PRG are any two PRGs in the M PRGs.
  • the method processor is further configured to determine the first frequency hopping bandwidth of the SRS resource corresponding to the fifth PRG, and send the beamforming of the PUSCH on the fifth PRG
  • the method is a beamforming method for sending the first SRS, wherein the fifth PRG is any one of the M PRGs; the first SRS is carried on the first frequency hopping bandwidth of the first SRS resource, so The resource index of the first SRS is the resource index of part or all of the SRS indicated by the second information.
  • the transmission of the first SRS is an SRS transmission with the smallest time domain interval from sending the second information.
  • the second information includes SRI.
  • the number of transmission layers of the PUSCH is equal to L
  • the number of PRGs corresponding to the frequency hopping bandwidth of the PUSCH satisfies H ⁇ P/L
  • the H is the indication of the second indication information
  • the communication apparatus may be a network device, or a component usable in a network device, such as a chip or a system of chips or a circuit.
  • the communication apparatus may include a transceiver and a processor.
  • the processor may be configured to support the communication apparatus to perform the corresponding functions of the network equipment shown above, and the transceiver is configured to support communication between the communication apparatus and other network equipment, terminal equipment, and the like.
  • the transceiver may be an independent receiver, an independent transmitter, a transceiver with integrated transceiver functions, or an interface circuit.
  • the communication device may further include a memory, which may be coupled to the processor, and stores necessary program instructions and data for the communication device.
  • the processor is configured to determine first information and second information, where the first information is used to indicate the frequency hopping bandwidth of the sounding reference signal SRS resources, and the second information is used to indicate part or all of the SRS resources An index of the SRS resource; a transceiver, configured to send the first information and the second information to the first communication apparatus, where the first information and the second information are used to determine N corresponding to the scheduling bandwidth of the PUSCH PRG, the N is a positive integer.
  • each PRG in the N PRGs corresponds to a frequency hopping bandwidth of the SRS resource.
  • the PRB with the lowest frequency in the first PRG and the PRB with the highest frequency in the second PRG respectively correspond to different frequency hopping bandwidths of the SRS resource; wherein, the first PRG and the second PRG PRGs are two adjacent PRGs in the frequency domain among the N PRGs, and the PRB with the lowest frequency in the first PRG and the PRB with the highest frequency in the second PRG are the two adjacent PRGs in the scheduling bandwidth of the PUSCH. PRBs.
  • the PRB with the highest frequency in the first PRG and the PRB with the lowest frequency in the second PRG respectively correspond to different frequency hopping bandwidths of the SRS resource;
  • PRGs are two adjacent PRGs in the frequency domain in the N PRGs, and the PRB with the highest frequency in the first PRG and the PRB with the lowest frequency in the second PRG are the two adjacent PRGs in the scheduling bandwidth of the PUSCH PRBs.
  • the third PRG and the fourth PRG correspond to the same frequency hopping bandwidth of the SRS resource, and the third PRG and the fourth PRG correspond to the SRS resource indicated by the second information
  • the indexes of are different; wherein, the third PRG and the fourth PRG are any two PRGs in the N PRGs.
  • the second information includes SRI.
  • the transceiver is further configured to indicate the number of transmission layers L of the PUSCH to the first communication apparatus; wherein, the N satisfies H ⁇ K/L, and the H is the first 2.
  • the number of the SRS resources indicated by the indication information, the K is the number of frequency hopping bandwidths of the SRS resources corresponding to the scheduling bandwidth of the PUSCH, and the H, K and L are all positive integers.
  • the processor is configured to determine third information, where the third information is used to indicate the frequency hopping bandwidth and frequency hopping times of the physical uplink shared channel PUSCH; the transceiver is configured to send the third information to the first communication device , the third information is used by the first communication apparatus to determine M precoding resource block groups PRG corresponding to the scheduling bandwidth of the physical uplink shared channel PUSCH, where M is a positive integer.
  • each PRG in the M PRGs corresponds to a frequency hopping bandwidth of the PUSCH.
  • the processor is further configured to determine first information, where the first information is used to indicate a frequency hopping bandwidth of the sounding reference signal SRS resource; the transceiver is further configured to communicate with the first The device sends the first information, and the first information and the third information are used by the first communication device to determine M PRGs corresponding to the scheduling bandwidth of the PUSCH, wherein each of the M PRGs Each PRG corresponds to one frequency hopping bandwidth of the SRS resource.
  • the processor is further configured to determine first information and second information, where the first information is used to indicate a frequency hopping bandwidth of the sounding reference signal SRS resource, and the second information is used to indicate an index of some or all of the SRS resources in the SRS resources;
  • the transceiver is further configured to send the first information and the second information to the first communication apparatus, the first information, the second information and the first information
  • the third information is used by the first communication apparatus to determine M PRGs corresponding to the scheduling bandwidth of the PUSCH, wherein each PRG in the M PRGs corresponds to a frequency hopping bandwidth of the SRS resource.
  • the PRB with the lowest frequency in the first PRG and the PRB with the highest frequency in the second PRG respectively correspond to different frequency hopping bandwidths of the SRS resource; wherein, the first PRG and the second PRG PRGs are two adjacent PRGs in the frequency domain among the M PRGs, and the PRB with the lowest frequency in the first PRG and the PRB with the highest frequency in the second PRG are the same frequency hopping of the scheduling bandwidth of the PUSCH Two PRBs that are adjacent in bandwidth.
  • the PRB with the highest frequency in the first PRG and the PRB with the lowest frequency in the second PRG respectively correspond to different frequency hopping bandwidths of the SRS resource;
  • PRGs are two adjacent PRGs in the frequency domain among the M PRGs, and the PRB with the highest frequency in the first PRG and the PRB with the lowest frequency in the second PRG are the same frequency hopping of the scheduling bandwidth of the PUSCH Two PRBs that are adjacent in bandwidth.
  • the third PRG and the fourth PRG correspond to the same frequency hopping bandwidth of the SRS resource, and the third PRG and the fourth PRG correspond to the SRS resource indicated by the second information
  • the indexes of are different; wherein, the third PRG and the fourth PRG are any two PRGs in the M PRGs.
  • the second information includes SRI.
  • the transceiver is further configured to indicate the number of transmission layers L of the PUSCH to the first communication device; wherein, the number of PRGs corresponding to the frequency hopping bandwidth of the PUSCH satisfies H ⁇ P /L, the H is the number of the SRS resources indicated by the second indication information, the P is the number of frequency hopping bandwidths of the SRS resources corresponding to the frequency hopping bandwidth of the PUSCH, the H, P and L is a positive integer.
  • the present application provides a communication device for implementing the first aspect or any method in the first aspect, or for implementing any one in the second aspect or the second aspect.
  • the functions can be implemented by hardware, or by executing corresponding software by hardware.
  • the hardware or software includes one or more modules corresponding to the above functions.
  • the communication device may be a terminal device, and the communication device may include a processing module and a transceiver module, and these modules may perform the corresponding functions of the terminal device in the above method example.
  • the communication device may include a processing module and a transceiver module, and these modules may perform the corresponding functions of the terminal device in the above method example.
  • the communication device may include a processing module and a transceiver module, and these modules may perform the corresponding functions of the terminal device in the above method example.
  • the communication device may include a processing module and a transceiver module, and these modules may perform the corresponding functions of the terminal device in the above method example.
  • the communication apparatus may also be a network device, and the communication apparatus may include a transceiver module and a processing module, and these modules may perform the corresponding functions of the network device in the above method examples.
  • the communication apparatus may include a transceiver module and a processing module, and these modules may perform the corresponding functions of the network device in the above method examples.
  • the communication apparatus may include a transceiver module and a processing module, and these modules may perform the corresponding functions of the network device in the above method examples.
  • the communication apparatus may include a transceiver module and a processing module, and these modules may perform the corresponding functions of the network device in the above method examples.
  • the present application provides a communication system, where the communication system includes a terminal device and a network device.
  • the terminal device can be used to execute any method in the first aspect or the first aspect
  • the network device can be used to execute any method in the third aspect or the third aspect; or, the terminal device can use
  • the network device may be used to perform any one of the above fourth aspect or the method in the fourth aspect.
  • the present application provides a computer-readable storage medium, in which a computer program or instruction is stored, and when the computer program or instruction is executed by a communication device, the communication device is made to perform the above-mentioned first aspect or the first aspect.
  • the method in any possible implementation of the one aspect, or the communication device is caused to perform the method in the second aspect or any possible implementation of the second aspect, or the communication device is caused to perform the third aspect or the third aspect.
  • the present application provides a computer program product, the computer program product includes a computer program or an instruction, when the computer program or instruction is executed by a communication device, the communication device is made to perform the above-mentioned first aspect or any of the first aspects.
  • the method in a possible implementation, or the communication device is caused to perform the method in the second aspect or any possible implementation of the second aspect, or the communication device is caused to perform the third aspect or any possible implementation of the third aspect.
  • the method in the implementation manner, or the communication apparatus is caused to perform the method in the fourth aspect or any possible implementation manner of the fourth aspect.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of a manner of indicating a PRG of a PUSCH in the prior art
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram of a frequency hopping mode provided by a kind of SRS resource for this application;
  • FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram of the architecture of a communication system provided by the present application.
  • FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram of a multi-TRP scenario provided by the present application.
  • 5 is a schematic diagram of the relationship between the number of PRBs included in a PRG provided by the application and the corresponding DCI transmission performance;
  • FIG. 6 is a schematic flowchart of a method of a communication method provided by the present application.
  • 7a is a schematic diagram of the relationship between a scheduling bandwidth of a PUSCH and a frequency hopping bandwidth of an SRS resource provided by the present application;
  • 7b is a schematic diagram of the relationship between the scheduling bandwidth of another PUSCH and the frequency hopping bandwidth of the SRS resource provided by the application;
  • FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram of the relationship between the frequency hopping bandwidth and the actual frequency hopping bandwidth of a kind of SRS resource provided by the present application;
  • FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram of the relationship between the scheduling bandwidth of another PUSCH and the frequency hopping bandwidth of the SRS resource provided by the present application.
  • FIG. 11 is a schematic structural diagram of a communication device provided by the application.
  • FIG. 12 is a schematic structural diagram of a communication device provided by the application.
  • FIG. 13 is a schematic structural diagram of a terminal device provided by the application.
  • FIG. 14 is a schematic structural diagram of a network device provided by this application.
  • Coherent joint reception refers to a technique in uplink coordinated multi-point transmission (CoMP).
  • multiple receiving nodes with a certain degree of spatial isolation will simultaneously exist on the network device side to receive the same uplink signal.
  • multiple receiving nodes can coherently combine the received signals to improve the antenna gain.
  • multiple receiving nodes can perform fast Fourier transform (fast Fourier transformation, FFT) transformation on the received signals, splicing them into a higher-dimensional signal matrix, and perform a minimum mean square error (minimum square error) on the signal matrix. mean square error, MMSE), or maximum ratio combining (maximum ratio combining, MRC) processing, which equivalently improves the signal-to-noise ratio of the received signal.
  • FFT fast Fourier transform
  • MMSE minimum mean square error
  • maximum ratio combining maximum ratio combining
  • the beamforming operation at the transmitting end refers to the use of the multi-antenna concurrent capability of the transmitting end to form a directional transmit signal in the transmission space by superimposing different phases on each transmit antenna to improve the signal transmission quality.
  • One way of operating beamforming is to use a precoding matrix W to map transmission layers or modulation symbols to individual transmit antennas or transmit antenna ports.
  • W is the precoding matrix
  • [y (0) (i)...y ( ⁇ -1) (i)] T is the modulation symbol on each transmission layer
  • z is the modulation symbol sent on each transmit antenna port.
  • the dimension of the precoding matrix may be P*R, where R is the number of transmission layers, and the number of transmission layers refers to the number of streams of orthogonal signals formed by a transport block (transport block, TB) or a code word (code word) in space; P is the number of antenna ports.
  • R is the number of transmission layers
  • the number of transmission layers refers to the number of streams of orthogonal signals formed by a transport block (transport block, TB) or a code word (code word) in space
  • P is the number of antenna ports.
  • Another way of operating beamforming is by adjusting the analog phase shifter on each transmit antenna port to form a directional beam, thereby improving the quality of the signal transmission.
  • Precoding resource block group (precoding resource group, PRG)
  • a PRG refers to a group of PRBs using the same beamforming method (eg, a precoding matrix).
  • the PRG in this application is a frequency domain concept, that is, each PRG includes at least one PRB.
  • the PRGs are defined based on the scheduling bandwidth of the PUSCH, and each PRG includes a part of the PRBs in the scheduling bandwidth of the PUSCH.
  • the scheduling bandwidth of the PUSCH refers to the bandwidth occupied by the PUSCH indicated by the network device through signaling.
  • the PRBs in a PRG are consecutive.
  • the so-called PRBs being consecutive means that the numbers of the PRBs are consecutive.
  • the scheduling bandwidth of the PUSCH includes PRB 0 , PRB 1 , PRB 2 . .
  • PRB 0 and PRB 1 are two consecutive PRBs
  • PRB 1 and PRB 2 are two consecutive PRBs.
  • the scheduling bandwidth of PUSCH includes PRB 0 , PRB 2 , PRB 5 . . ., then PRB 0 and PRB 2 are two consecutive PRBs, and PRB 2 and PRB 5 are also two consecutive PRBs.
  • the physical resource block (physical resource block, PRB) includes 12 consecutive subcarriers.
  • the terminal device will send the SRS on the SRS resource.
  • the configuration of an SRS resource includes time-frequency resources occupied by the resource.
  • the SRS resource can be configured with a frequency hopping mode, which usually means that one SRS resource does not occupy the entire system bandwidth within one orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (OFDM) symbol, that is, it is filled by multiple OFDM symbols.
  • the system bandwidth refers to the bandwidth that the terminal device can communicate with the network device, and the system bandwidth can be understood as a carrier (component carrier), or a bandwidth part (BWP). It can also be understood that one OFDM symbol can sound a part of the system bandwidth, and multiple OFDM symbols, or even multiple slots (slots composed of multiple OFDM symbols) are required to sound the entire system bandwidth. That is, for the same SRS resource, the bandwidth occupied by the SRS resource on different OFDM symbols is different.
  • a schematic diagram of a SRS resource provided by the present application is a frequency hopping mode.
  • the configured 4 SRS resources (SRS resource 0, SRS resource 1, SRS resource 2, and SRS resource 3) occupy the same bandwidth on the same symbol, and each SRS resource occupies 4 symbols in the time domain. occupy different bandwidth.
  • For the SRS on each SRS resource one OFDM symbol can detect 1/4 of the system bandwidth, and 4 OFDM symbols are required to detect the entire system bandwidth.
  • the network device can receive the SRS on the 4 symbols respectively, so as to obtain a complete uplink channel according to the SRS received on the 4 symbols.
  • the SRS resource and the scheduling bandwidth of the PUSCH are located in the same carrier (component carrier, CC), or in the same partial bandwidth (bandwidth part, BWP). It can also be understood that the SRS resource and the scheduling bandwidth of the PUSCH are located within the same system bandwidth.
  • the terminal device transmits the SRS in different beamforming manners on multiple SRS resources respectively.
  • the network device will indicate at least one SRS resource or SRS port (one SRS resource may include one SRS port) when scheduling the PUSCH, and the terminal device determines the beamforming mode adopted by the transmission layer of the PUSCH according to the indicated SRS resource.
  • SRS resources or SRS ports There is a correspondence between SRS resources or SRS ports and a PUSCH transmission layer. For example, one SRS resource corresponds to one PUSCH transmission layer; for another example, multiple SRS resources correspond to one PUSCH transmission layer.
  • FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram of the architecture of a communication system to which the present application can be applied.
  • the communication system may include a network device 101 and a terminal device 102 .
  • Terminal devices can communicate with network devices wirelessly.
  • Terminal equipment can be fixed or movable.
  • FIG. 3 is only a schematic diagram, the communication system may also include other network devices, such as wireless relay devices and wireless backhaul devices, which are not shown in FIG. 3 .
  • This application does not limit the number of network devices and terminal devices included in the communication system.
  • a network device is an access device that a terminal device wirelessly accesses to the communication system, and can provide a wireless communication function for the terminal device. It can be a base station (base station), an evolved base station (evolved NodeB, eNodeB), a transmission (transmission and reception) point (transmission reception point, TRP), the next generation base station (next generation NodeB, gNB) in the 5G communication system, future communication
  • the embodiments of the present application do not limit the specific technology and specific device form adopted by the network device.
  • a terminal device may also be referred to as a terminal, user equipment (UE), a mobile station, a mobile terminal, and the like.
  • the terminal equipment can be mobile phone, tablet computer, computer with wireless transceiver function, virtual reality terminal equipment, augmented reality terminal equipment, wireless terminal in industrial control, wireless terminal in unmanned driving, wireless terminal in remote surgery, smart grid wireless terminals in transportation security, wireless terminals in smart cities, wireless terminals in smart homes, etc. This application does not limit the specific technology and specific device form adopted by the terminal device.
  • Network equipment and terminal equipment can be deployed on land, including indoor or outdoor, handheld or vehicle; can also be deployed on water; can also be deployed in the air on aircraft, balloons and satellites. This application does not limit the application scenarios of network devices and terminal devices.
  • the network device and the terminal device can communicate through the licensed spectrum, the unlicensed spectrum, or the licensed spectrum and the unlicensed spectrum at the same time.
  • the network device and the terminal device can communicate through the frequency spectrum below 6 GHz (gigahertz, GHz), and can also communicate through the frequency spectrum above 6 GHz, and can also use the frequency spectrum below 6 GHz and the frequency spectrum above 6 GHz for communication at the same time.
  • This application does not limit the spectrum resources used between the network device and the terminal device.
  • the communication system in this application may be a fourth generation (4th generation, 4G) mobile communication system, or a fifth generation (5th generation, 5G) mobile communication system, or may be other communication systems, such as a public land mobile network (public land mobile network).
  • land mobile network, PLMN) system or other mobile communication systems that may appear in the future, etc., are not limited in this application.
  • a multi-TRP scenario is provided for this application.
  • Multiple TRPs 302 can be connected to the same baseband unit (baseband unit, BBU) 301, or can be connected to different BBUs 301, which are not limited in this application.
  • the BBU in FIG. 4 takes the base station as an example, and the TRP takes the terminal device as an example for example.
  • An implementation form of the multi-TRP scenario in 4G is a single frequency network cell (single frequency network cell, SFN cell), and an implementation form in 5G is a hyper cell (hyper cell).
  • the network device needs to acquire channel information before scheduling uplink data (eg, PUSCH used to carry uplink control information and service data).
  • the terminal equipment is required to send the SRS to the network equipment on the SRS resource, and the network equipment measures the SRS sent by the terminal equipment, and then according to the measurement result, can select the SRS resource with better performance to be allocated to the terminal equipment, so that the terminal equipment can send the uplink data. That is, the network device can measure the SRS to determine the uplink channel quality, so as to perform uplink frequency selective scheduling.
  • the network device after the terminal device accesses the network, the network device will send a downlink reference signal or a downlink channel to the terminal device, and the network device will configure SRS resources for the terminal device.
  • the terminal device can obtain the beamforming mode of the adapted channel based on the downlink reference signal or the downlink channel, and the terminal device can use the acquired beamforming mode on the SRS resources configured by the network device to weight the transmit antennas to transmit the SRS.
  • the network device may receive and measure the SRS on the corresponding SRS resource to obtain uplink channel information.
  • the network device may select some SRS resources from the multiple SRS resources based on the obtained uplink channel information (for example, the network device may The power or strength of the received SRS or signal noise rate (signal noise rate, SNR), etc., select the SRS resource corresponding to the SRS with better signal quality), and indicate the selected SRS resource to the terminal equipment through DCI.
  • the network device may respectively indicate the index of the selected SRS resource to the terminal device.
  • the selected SRS resource can be indicated by the SRI field, and different SRI field indication values correspond to different SRS resources.
  • One SRI field can indicate one SRS resource or multiple SRS resources.
  • the SRI field can be carried in DCI or wireless In resource control (radio resource control, RRC); the terminal device can determine the SRS resources indicated by the network device and the number of SRS resources according to the received SRI field in the DCI or RRC, and determine the PUSCH according to the number of the indicated SRS resources.
  • the number of transmission layers, and the beamforming method adopted by each transmission layer can also be understood that the network device selects one or more beamforming modes from multiple candidate beamforming modes determined by the terminal device, and indicates to the terminal device through the SRI field.
  • the network device can also select one or more beamforming modes from multiple beamforming modes by itself, and indicate to the terminal device through the SRI field. It should be understood that the number of transmission layers of the PUSCH may change dynamically with the indicated number of SRS resources.
  • the terminal device In order to improve the spectral efficiency and reliability of the uplink transmission, the terminal device usually transmits the PUSCH by using frequency selective precoding, that is, the scheduling bandwidth of the PUSCH is divided into PRGs.
  • the network device may indicate multiple SRI fields, each SRI field corresponds to a PRG, and the terminal device determines, according to the SRI field in the received DCI, the beamforming mode used when sending data on the PRG corresponding to the scheduling bandwidth of the PUSCH.
  • the scheduling indication of PUSCH1 includes two SRI fields, and one SRI field corresponds to one PRG. Therefore, the scheduling bandwidth of PUSCH1 can be divided into two PRGs.
  • the beamforming mode adopted and the beamforming mode adopted to transmit data on SRS resource 1 are used to transmit the PUSCH.
  • the smaller the granularity of the PRG that is, the smaller the number of PRBs included in the PRG
  • the smaller the granularity of the PRG the more the number of PRGs included in the scheduling bandwidth of PUSCH, and since a PRG needs an SRI field indication, the number of SRI fields will be larger, which will increase The overhead of the DCI carrying the SRI field will reduce the transmission performance of the DCI. Referring to FIG.
  • the corresponding DCI transmission performance is higher than the corresponding DCI transmission performance when one PRG includes 16 PRBs. Especially in the scenario where the scheduling bandwidth of PUSCH is large, if more PRGs are included, the transmission performance of DCI will be lower.
  • the present application proposes a communication method, through which the PRG determined has high accuracy, thereby helping to improve the transmission performance of the PUSCH and reducing signaling overhead.
  • the corresponding relationship between the indication value of the SRI field and the index of the SRS resource may refer to Table 1 to Table 4 below.
  • the terminal device can obtain in advance the method of how to determine the index of the SRS resource corresponding to the value indicated by the SRI field. For example, the terminal device can obtain in advance the number of SRS resources configured for PUSCH channel state information measurement N SRS (corresponding to Table 1).
  • NSRS in -4 wherein the configured NSRS SRS resources can be used for the above-mentioned non-codebook-based transmission mode transmission, and the NSRS can be configured through RRC signaling; and the information indicated by the SRI field can be obtained in advance
  • the maximum number of SRS resources, and the indication information for interpreting the SRI field from one of Table 1 to Table 4 is determined according to the above information.
  • one indicated SRS resource may correspond to one PUSCH transmission layer, or multiple indicated SRS resources may correspond to one PUSCH transmission layer.
  • the corresponding relationship between the index value of the SRI field and the SRS resource obtained by the terminal device may be notified by the network device to the terminal device, or may be predetermined by the protocol, or may be predetermined by the network device and the terminal device. This is not limited.
  • Table 1 The maximum number of SRS resources that can be selected is 1, and the meaning of the value indicated by the SRI field
  • each SRI field indication value corresponds to The number of SRS resources is 1; when the maximum number of SRS resources that can be selected is 2, the index of the SRS resources indicated by the SRI field indication value can be determined from Table 2, and the number of SRS resources corresponding to each SRI field indication value can be is 1 to 2; when the maximum number of SRS resources that can be selected is 3, the index of the SRS resources indicated by the SRI field indication value can be determined from Table 3, and the number of SRS resources corresponding to each SRI field indication value can be 1 to 3; when the maximum number of SRS resources that can be selected is 4, the index of the SRS resource indicated by the SRI field indication value can be determined from Table 4, and the number of SRS resources corresponding to each SRI field indication value can be 1 to 4 .
  • Tables 1 to 4 are schematic representations of the correspondences, and in the implementation process, they may be similar correspondences or sets of correspondences, or parts of the foregoing correspondences.
  • the network device or the terminal device may store the above-mentioned correspondence.
  • the corresponding relationships in Tables 1 to 4 are the same in some cases, for example, the same field indication value and the same N srs are the same, and can also be combined into a corresponding relationship set.
  • Tables 1 to 4 are only exemplary implementations showing the corresponding relationship between the SRI field indication value and the index of the SRS resource.
  • the number of bits of the SRI field corresponding to different tables is different.
  • the value indicated by the SRI field may also be represented by a binary number; for example, Table 4 may also be represented by the following Table 5. It should be understood that the specific representation of the value indicated by the SRI field may be agreed between the network device and the terminal device, or may be determined by the network device and notified to the terminal device, or may be specified by a protocol, which is not limited in this application.
  • the multiple SRS resources indicated by the SRI field may each correspond to the transmission layer of one PUSCH, or some of the SRS resources in the multiple SRS resources may collectively correspond to the transmission layer of one PUSCH. Each of the SRS resources corresponds to different PRGs of the PUSCH.
  • the number of transmission layers of the PUSCH is 1.
  • the number of transmission layers of the PUSCH is 1.
  • each PRG on the scheduling bandwidth of the PUSCH corresponds to the indication of the SRI field.
  • the SRS resource indicated by the value when the SRI field indicates that the value is any of 4-9, there are different PRGs corresponding to different SRS resources on the scheduling bandwidth of the PUSCH. For example, when the SRI field indicates that the value is 4, the SRS resource 0 corresponds to PRG 0, SRS resource 1 corresponds to PRG 1.
  • each PRG on the scheduling bandwidth of the PUSCH is Corresponding to the SRS resource indicated by the indicated value of the SRI field, when the indicated value of the SRI field is any one of 4-13, there are different PRGs corresponding to different SRS resources on the scheduling bandwidth of the PUSCH, for example, when the indicated value of the SRI field is 10 , SRS resource 0 corresponds to PRG 0, SRS resource 1 corresponds to PRG 1, and SRS resource 2 corresponds to PRG2.
  • the number of transmission layers of PUSCH is 1, and the indicated value of the SRI field is 14, and the number of transmission layers of PUSCH is 2.
  • the indicated value of the SRI field is any one of 0-13, the same as Table 1-3
  • the indicated value of the SRI field is 14, the number of transmission layers of PUSCH is 2, and there are different PRGs corresponding to different SRSs in the scheduling bandwidth of PUSCH Resource, for example, SRS resource 0 and SRS resource 1 correspond to PUSCH transmission layer 1, SRS resource 2 and SRS resource 3 correspond to PUSCH transmission layer 2, for each PUSCH transmission layer, different SRS resources correspond to different PRGs, such as SRS Resource 0 and SRS resource 2 correspond to PUSCH transmission layer 1 and transmission layer 2 on PRG 0, respectively, and SRS resource 1 and SRS resource 3 correspond to PUSCH transmission layer 1 and transmission layer 2 on PRG 1, respectively.
  • Table 4 only the field indication value 14 in Table 4 can be used to indicate the PUSCH transmission with more than one layer. In order to improve the flexibility of the network device to indicate the PUSCH beamforming mode, it can further be used for the case where the number of PUSCH transmission layers is greater than 1.
  • Table 6 is designed. There are multiple field indication values in Table 6 to indicate the beamforming mode when the number of PUSCH transmission layers is greater than 1.
  • the communication method provided by the present application may be applied to the communication system shown in FIG. 3 or the application scenario shown in FIG. 4 .
  • the method may be performed by two communication devices, such as a first communication device and a second communication device, wherein the first communication device may be a terminal device or a module applicable to the terminal device, such as a chip.
  • the second communication device may be a network device or a module applicable to the network device, such as a chip.
  • the method provided by the present application will be described below by taking the example that the first communication device is a terminal device and the second communication device is a network device.
  • FIG. 6 it is a schematic flowchart of a method of a communication method provided by the present application. The method includes the following steps:
  • Step 601 the network device determines the first information and the second information.
  • the first information is used to indicate the frequency hopping bandwidth of the SRS resources
  • the second information is used to indicate indexes of some or all of the SRS resources in the SRS resources.
  • the frequency hopping bandwidth of the SRS resource refers to: for the same SRS resource, there are multiple transmissions in the time domain, the frequency domain resources occupied by each transmission are different, and the frequency domain resources occupied by one transmission (or called bandwidth or RB number) is the frequency hopping bandwidth.
  • the network device can configure 4 SRS resources for the terminal device, and the indexes of the 4 SRS resources are 0-3, which can be called SRS resource 0, SRS resource 1, SRS resource 2 and SRS resource 3; the first information It can be used to indicate that the frequency hopping bandwidth of each SRS resource (that is, SRS resource 0, SRS resource 1, SRS resource 2 and SRS resource 3) is 16 PRBs, and the PRB position occupied by each frequency hopping bandwidth is shown in Figure 2. Show.
  • the frequency hopping bandwidth of the SRS resource indicated by the first information can also be 4 PRBs, 8 PRBs, or 32 PRBs, etc.
  • the size of the frequency hopping bandwidth is related to the uplink coverage performance of the terminal equipment. When the performance is poor, the number of PRBs included in the frequency hopping bandwidth is usually smaller; on the contrary, when the uplink coverage performance is better, the number of PRBs included in the frequency hopping bandwidth is usually larger.
  • Each PRB includes 12 subcarriers, and the corresponding bandwidth of each subcarrier can be 15kHz or 30kHz or 60kHz or 120kHz; the total number of PRBs occupied by SRS resources can be the system bandwidth or BWP or the total number of PRBs occupied by the carrier, which can be smaller than the PRB Usually, in order to ensure the SRS transmission performance, the PRBs included in each frequency hopping bandwidth are configured to be continuous; the frequency hopping rule refers to the pre-defined position of the frequency hopping bandwidth on each OFDM symbol, different OFDM symbols The frequency hopping bandwidths are non-overlapping.
  • the network device may select the SRS resource from the configured multiple SRS resources based on the strength or power of the SRS signal from the terminal device; the second information may be used to indicate the index of the selected SRS resource.
  • the selected SRS resource may be part or all of the SRS resource set, the SRS resource set includes at least one SRS resource, and the SRS resource set is a resource set based on non-codebook uplink transmission, and the SRS resource in the resource set Configuration through RRC signaling includes configuring the index of each SRS resource, frequency hopping bandwidth configuration, power information configuration, sequence configuration, etc.
  • the second information may be an SRI field, and the meaning of the value indicated by the SRI field may refer to Tables 1-4 and Table 6 above.
  • the first information may include the frequency hopping bandwidth size configuration information of the SRS resources, the total number of PRBs occupied by the SRS resources, the location configuration information of each PRB, and the frequency hopping rules, and configure the SRS for the terminal device.
  • the hopping bandwidth of the resource includes information that can indicate the position and number of PRBs occupied by the SRS resources in each transmission. It can include the information exemplified above, or other information, which this application does not do. limited.
  • Step 602 the network device sends the first information and the second information to the terminal device. Accordingly, the terminal device receives the first information and the second information from the network device.
  • the first information may be carried in radio resource control (radio resource control, RRC) signaling
  • the second information may be carried in DCI signaling
  • the network device may first send the RRC signaling to the terminal device, and then send the DCI signaling.
  • the first information and the second information may also be carried in the same message.
  • the terminal device may determine N PRGs corresponding to the scheduling bandwidth of the PUSCH according to the first information and the second information, where N is a positive integer.
  • determining the N PRGs corresponding to the scheduling bandwidth of the PUSCH by the terminal device refers to: determining the number N of PRGs corresponding to the scheduling bandwidth of the PUSCH, the number of PRBs included in each PRG in the N PRGs, and the number of PRBs included in each PRG.
  • the starting position and the ending position reference may be made to the following implementation manners 1 and 2, which will not be repeated here.
  • step 603 may also be that the terminal device may determine the scheduling bandwidth of the PUSCH according to the first information and the second information.
  • the terminal device may determine, according to the first information and the second information, the frequency domain granularity of the beamforming manner adopted by the PUSCH.
  • the scheduling bandwidth of PUSCH is divided into N PRGs, and each PRG is used as the frequency domain granularity of the beamforming method.
  • the same beamforming method is used; different PRGs can use different beamforming methods.
  • the beamforming mode adopted by each PRG is also determined according to the first information and the second information.
  • each PRG in the above N PRGs corresponds to a frequency hopping bandwidth of the SRS resource.
  • the frequency hopping bandwidth of one PRG corresponding to one SRS refers to: the bandwidth occupied by the PRG of the PUSCH is the same as the frequency hopping bandwidth of the SRS, or the bandwidth occupied by the PRG corresponding to the PUSCH is a subset of the frequency hopping bandwidth of the SRS (that is, the frequency hopping bandwidth of the SRS).
  • the frequency hopping bandwidth contains the PRG of the corresponding PUSCH).
  • Relation 1 (taking the adjacent first PRG and second PRG in the frequency domain as an example), the PRB with the lowest frequency in the first PRG and the PRB with the highest frequency in the second PRG respectively correspond to different frequency hopping bandwidths of the SRS resources;
  • the PRG and the second PRG are two adjacent PRGs in the frequency domain in the N PRGs, and the PRB with the lowest frequency in the first PRG and the PRB with the highest frequency in the second PRG are two PRBs adjacent in the scheduling bandwidth of the PUSCH.
  • the PRB with the highest frequency in the first PRG and the PRB with the lowest frequency in the second PRG respectively correspond to different frequency hopping bandwidths of the SRS resources; wherein the first PRG and the second PRG are two adjacent ones in the frequency domain among the N PRGs PRG, the PRB with the highest frequency in the first PRG and the PRB with the lowest frequency in the second PRG are two adjacent PRBs on the scheduling bandwidth of the PUSCH.
  • PRB 0 is the PRB with the lowest frequency in the scheduling bandwidth of PUSCH
  • PRB m is the PRB with the highest frequency in the scheduling bandwidth of PUSCH
  • PRB m is the scheduling bandwidth of PUSCH PRB with the lowest frequency in the middle.
  • the numbers of PRBs included in the scheduling bandwidth of the PUSCH are consecutive, and two adjacent PRBs refer to two consecutive PRBs.
  • PRB 0 and PRB 1 are two adjacent PRBs
  • PRB 1 and PRB 2 are two consecutive PRBs. two adjacent PRBs, etc.
  • the numbers of PRBs included in the scheduling bandwidth of PUSCH may also be discontinuous.
  • the scheduling bandwidth of PUSCH includes PRB 0 , PRB 2 , PRB 5 , PRB 6 . . . Refers to two adjacent PRBs numbered, for example, PRB 0 and PRB 2 are two adjacent PRBs, PRB 2 and PRB 5 are two adjacent PRBs, and so on.
  • the scheduling bandwidth of PUSCH includes PRB 0 , PRB 1 , PRB 2 ?? PRB 7 , PRB 0 , PRB 1 , PRB 2 ?? PRB 7 is from high to low or from low to low in frequency as follows For example, the order of the highest.
  • the first PRG is PRG0
  • the second PRG is PRG1
  • the third PRG is PRG2
  • the fourth PRG is PRG3, where PRG0 includes PRB 0 and PRB 1
  • PRG1 includes PRB 2 and PRB 3
  • PRG2 includes PRB 4 and PRB 5
  • PRG3 includes PRB 6 and PRB 7 .
  • the first PRG is PRG1
  • the second PRG is PRG2
  • the PRBs included in PRG1 correspond to
  • the frequency hopping bandwidth 1 of the SRS resource does not correspond to the frequency hopping bandwidth 2 of the SRS resource, that is, the frequency domain of PRG1 overlaps with the frequency hopping bandwidth 1 of the SRS resource but does not overlap the frequency domain of the frequency hopping bandwidth 2 of the SRS resource;
  • the included PRBs all correspond to the frequency hopping bandwidth 2 of the SRS resource but do not correspond to the frequency hopping bandwidth 1 of the SRS resource, that is to say, the PRG2 overlaps with the frequency hopping bandwidth 2 of the SRS resource and does not overlap with the frequency hopping bandwidth 1 of the SRS resource.
  • the PRB 0 , PRB 1 , PRB 2 , ... PRB 7 included in the scheduling bandwidth of the PUSCH are arranged in the order of frequency from high to low, the first PRG is PRG2, the second PRG is PRG1, and PRG1 and PRG2 correspond to SRS resources.
  • PRG1 and PRG2 correspond to SRS resources.
  • the third PRG and the fourth PRG correspond to the same frequency hopping bandwidth of the SRS resource
  • the third PRG and the fourth PRG correspond to the index of the SRS resource indicated by the second information
  • the third PRG and the fourth PRG are any two PRGs corresponding to the frequency hopping bandwidth of the same SRS resource among the N PRGs. It should be understood that the frequency hopping bandwidth of one SRS resource includes the third PRG and the fourth PRG.
  • the second information indicates that the indices of the SRS resources are 0 (referred to as SRS resource 0) and 1 (referred to as SRS resource 1); within the frequency hopping bandwidth 1 of the SRS resource, PRG0 is the third PRG and PRG1 is The fourth PRG, PRG0 corresponds to SRS resource 0 indicated by the second information, and PRG1 corresponds to SRS resource 1 indicated by the second information.
  • PRG2 is the third PRG and PRG3 is the fourth PRG
  • PRG2 corresponds to SRS resource 0 indicated by the second information
  • PRG3 corresponds to SRS resource 1 indicated by the second information.
  • the index of one PRG corresponding to one SRS resource means that the beamforming manner used for transmitting the PUSCH on the PRG is determined according to the index of the corresponding SRS resource.
  • the beamforming mode used by the terminal device to send the SRS on the SRS resource is used to send the PUSCH on the corresponding PRG.
  • one of the third PRG and the fourth PRG may be the same as the first PRG or the same as the second PRG.
  • the third PRG is the same as the first PRG, and the fourth PRG is different from the second PRG; for another example, the third PRG is the same as the second PRG, and the fourth PRG is different from the first PRG.
  • the first PRG and the second PRG that satisfy the relationship 1 between the two adjacent PRGs in the frequency domain also exist, and there are also the third PRG and the fourth PRG that satisfy the relationship 2. prg.
  • the N PRGs in the PUSCH there may only be the first PRG and the second PRG that satisfy the above relationship 1 between two PRGs that are adjacent in the frequency domain.
  • PRG0 is the first PRG
  • PRG1 is the second PRG
  • PRG0 is the third PRG
  • PRG1 is the fourth PRG.
  • both PRG0 and PRG1 in PUSCH3 correspond to SRS resource 0 indicated by the second indication information, but the frequency hopping bandwidth of the SRS resource corresponding to PRG0 is different from the frequency hopping bandwidth of the SRS resource corresponding to PRG1.
  • PRG0 and PRG1 correspond to different beamforming methods.
  • PRG0 and PRG1 in PUSCH4 also correspond to different beamforming modes.
  • the second information may be SRI.
  • the indication value of the SRI field may reuse the indication value of the existing SRI indication field (Tables 1 to 4), or a new corresponding relationship (such as Table 6) may be designed according to actual requirements. Taking the above Table 4 as an example, when the SRI field indicator value is 0 to 3, one SRI field indicator value indicates one SRS resource; when the SRI field indicator value is 4 to 14, one SRI field indicator value indicates multiple SRS resources.
  • the index of the SRS resource indicated by the SRI field indication value corresponds to the PRG one-to-one, and the index of the SRS resource indicated by the SRI field indication value is in descending order.
  • the number of transmission layers limiting the PUSCH may be predefined by the protocol, or may be indicated by the network device explicitly through signaling or implicitly through other parameters, and the signaling may be RRC signaling or DCI signaling.
  • the network device indicates through RRC signaling that the number of PUSCH transmission layers is limited to 1, then when Table 2 is used and the SRI indication value is 4, SRS resource 0 and SRS resource 1 correspond to different PRGs respectively.
  • the first PRG and the second PRG correspond to the frequency hopping bandwidth of the same SRS resource.
  • the indices of the SRS resource indicated by the indication value of the SRI field are 0 and 1, the index of the SRS resource being 0 corresponds to the first PRG, and the index of the SRS resource being 1 corresponds to the second PRG.
  • the first PRG corresponds to the first SRS resource indicated by the SRI field indication value
  • the second PRG corresponds to the second SRS resource indicated by the SRI field indication value.
  • Step 604 the terminal device determines the beamforming mode of the PUSCH corresponding to each PRG in the N PRGs.
  • This step 604 is an optional step.
  • the beamforming manner of the PUSCH corresponding to each PRG can also be understood as the beamforming manner of transmitting the PUSCH on each PRG.
  • the SRS resources indicated by the SRI field correspond to a group of candidate beamforming modes
  • the number of candidate beamforming modes is the total number of SRS resources that can be indicated multiplied by the number of SRS frequency hopping bandwidths. For example, taking FIG. 7a as an example, a total of 4 SRS resources are configured, and each SRS resource is configured with 4 frequency hopping, then under this configuration, the number of candidate beamforming modes is 16.
  • One SRS resource corresponds to one candidate beamforming mode on one frequency hopping bandwidth.
  • the terminal device determines beamforming modes respectively on different frequency hopping bandwidths. For example, according to the channel information corresponding to different frequency hopping bandwidths, eigenvector extraction is performed respectively to form different beamforming modes. 2, the candidate beamforming modes corresponding to the same SRS resource on 4 symbols (symbol 1 to symbol 4) can be different, and the beamforming modes adopted by each SRS resource to transmit SRS on 4 symbols are different from each other. same.
  • the beamforming methods used for SRS resource 1 to transmit SRS on symbols 1 to 4 may be 4 different beamforming methods, and the beamforming methods used for SRS resource 2 to transmit SRS on symbols 1 to 4
  • the beamforming mode can be 4 different beamforming modes. It can also be understood that the beamforming manners used for the same SRS resource on the four subbands (or called frequency hopping) are different. For example, when the SRI field indicates SRS resource 0, both the first PRG and the second PRG correspond to SRS resource 0, but since the first PRG and the second PRG correspond to different frequency hopping bandwidths of the SRS resource, the first PRG and the second PRG The corresponding beamforming methods are different.
  • the fifth PRG is taken as an example to illustrate, and the fifth PRG is any one of the N PRGs. It should be understood that the fifth PRG may be the same as the first PRG, or the same as the second PRG, or the same as the third PRG, or the same as the fourth PRG.
  • the terminal device may determine the first frequency hopping bandwidth of the SRS resource corresponding to the fifth PRG, and further determine the index of the SRS resource corresponding to the fifth PRG according to the SRI field indication value (second information),
  • the SRS resource corresponding to the fifth PRG is called the first SRS resource
  • the beamforming mode for sending the PUSCH on the fifth PRG is the beamforming mode for transmitting the first SRS, wherein the beamforming mode for transmitting the first SRS may be The beamforming mode adopted for transmitting the SRS on the first frequency hopping bandwidth of the first SRS resource, that is, the first SRS is carried on the first frequency hopping bandwidth of the first SRS resource.
  • the first frequency hopping bandwidth corresponding to PRG3 is: the frequency hopping bandwidth of SRS resource 0, SRS resource 1, SRS resource 2 and SRS resource 3 in OFDM symbol 4, and further,
  • the index of PRG3 corresponding to the SRS resource indicated by the second information is 1 (referred to as SRS resource 1), that is to say, the beamforming method for sending PUSCH on PRG3 is: on SRS resource 1 and at the hop corresponding to OFDM symbol 4
  • the time domain interval between the transmission of the first SRS and the transmission of the second information is the smallest, for example, the time domain interval between the transmission of the first SRS resource of the first SRS and the time domain of the transmission of the second information is the smallest.
  • the first SRS resource is an SRS resource corresponding to the time domain of the primary SRS resource with the smallest time domain interval for sending the second information.
  • the SRS resource configuration may be periodic, that is, SRS may be sent on the same frequency hopping bandwidth in different periods, at this time, for one PRG, it may correspond to multiple beamforming
  • the beamforming modes correspond to the beamforming modes adopted for transmitting SRS on the same frequency hopping bandwidth of the same SRS resource in different periods.
  • the present application further defines the beamforming mode adopted by the PRG, that is, the first SRS is determined as the SRS in the SRS transmission cycle with the smallest time interval from the time interval at which the SRI indication information is sent.
  • the terminal device determines the beamforming mode adopted by the PRG of the PUSCH according to the beamforming mode adopted by the corresponding SRS in the period.
  • the beamforming mode for sending PUSCH in different PRGs is determined according to the beamforming mode used for sending SRS on the corresponding SRS resources and the corresponding frequency hopping bandwidth. In this way, the beamforming mode of different PRGs can be ensured. are different, and are more suitable for the channel of uplink transmission, which can improve the transmission performance of PUSCH.
  • Step 605 the terminal device sends the PUSCH according to the N PRGs.
  • the network device receives the PUSCH from the terminal device according to the N PRGs.
  • the terminal device may send the PUSCH to the network device using a corresponding beamforming manner on each PRG determined. It should be understood that the beamforming manners used for transmitting PUSCH and DMRS on one PRG are the same.
  • the N PRGs corresponding to the scheduling bandwidth of the PUSCH are determined according to the frequency hopping bandwidth of the SRS resources and the index of the SRS resources indicated by the second information.
  • the determined PRGs can be relatively This ensures that the beamforming mode of each PRG is as optimal as possible without increasing the DCI overhead, thereby improving the transmission performance of the PUSCH.
  • the terminal device may determine N PRGs corresponding to the scheduling bandwidth of the PUSCH according to the first information and the second information.
  • the following exemplarily shows a possible implementation manner in which the terminal device determines N PRGs corresponding to the scheduling bandwidth of the PUSCH.
  • the number of transmission layers of the PUSCH is equal to L
  • the number of the SRS resources indicated by the second indication information is H
  • the frequency hopping of the SRS resources corresponding to the scheduling bandwidth of the PUSCH The number (or times) of the bandwidth is K
  • the H, K and L are all positive integers.
  • the number L of transmission layers of the PUSCH may be determined by the terminal device according to the second information sent by the network device, or may be determined according to other information, or pre-agreed by a protocol.
  • the protocol pre-agrees: when the number of SRS resources indicated by the second information is less than 4, the number of transmission layers L of PUSCH is equal to 1, and when the number of SRS resources indicated by the second information is equal to 4, the number of transmission layers of PUSCH L is equal to 2.
  • the protocol pre-stipulates that the number of transmission layers of the current PUSCH is 1.
  • the number of transmission layers L of the PUSCH determined by the terminal device according to the second information sent by the network device may specifically be: the second information additionally indicates the number of transmission layers of the PUSCH.
  • the SRS is sent on each PRB within the frequency hopping bandwidth of the SRS resource, or, within the frequency hopping bandwidth of the SRS resource, the SRS is only sent on some PRBs, and the SRS is not sent on the remaining PRBs.
  • the actual occupied bandwidth can be called the actual frequency hopping bandwidth, see Figure 8.
  • the beamforming mode for sending the PUSCH on any one of the N PRGs included in the PUSCH is: the beamforming mode for sending the first SRS, where the first SRS The actual frequency hopping bandwidth in the frequency hopping bandwidth of the SRS resource corresponding to the PRG is occupied. In this way, it is helpful to save the SRS resource overhead and improve the reception quality of the SRS.
  • the network device may configure a threshold value through RRC signaling.
  • the terminal device determines the PRG of the PUSCH according to the relationship between the threshold value and the frequency hopping bandwidth of the SRS resource. Specifically, when the frequency hopping bandwidth of the SRS resource is greater than the threshold value, the PRG of the PUSCH may be determined according to the description of the above embodiment, and details are not repeated here. When the frequency hopping bandwidth of the SRS resource is less than the threshold value, the PRG of the PUSCH can be determined only according to the number of frequency hopping bandwidths of the SRS resource corresponding to the scheduling bandwidth of the PUSCH. At this time, the number of SRS resources indicated by the SRI field is no longer used for determination.
  • PRG is used to indicate the number of transmission layers of PUSCH.
  • the number of SRS resources indicated by the SRI field is equal to the number of transmission layers of PUSCH. That is to say, when the frequency hopping bandwidth of the SRS resource is small (for example, there are only 4 PRBs), at this time, since the PRG of the PUSCH is only determined according to the frequency hopping bandwidth of the SRS resource corresponding to the scheduling bandwidth of the PUSCH, the PRG will also be small.
  • the accuracy indicated by the beamforming method can be met; when the frequency hopping bandwidth of the SRS resource is large, if the PRG is determined only based on the frequency hopping bandwidth of the SRS resource corresponding to the scheduling bandwidth of the PUSCH, the larger PRG will not be able to satisfy the beamforming. Therefore, it is necessary to further divide the PRG according to the number of SRS resources indicated by the SRI, so as to obtain a relatively finer beamforming mode indication accuracy.
  • the above-mentioned threshold value may be a parameter value, and may be the PRG of the PUSCH determined according to the relationship between the frequency modulation bandwidth and the parameter value.
  • Table 7 Meaning of the SRI field indication value when the maximum number of SRS resources that can be selected is 4
  • Table 8 Meaning of the SRI field indication value when the maximum number of SRS resources that can be selected is 4
  • the scheduling bandwidth of PUSCH4 overlaps with a frequency hopping bandwidth of the SRS resource, that is, the SRS resource included in the scheduling bandwidth of PUSCH4
  • the scheduling bandwidth of PUSCH includes PRB0, PRB1, PRB2, PRB3, PRB4, PRB5, PRB6 and PRB7.
  • the terminal device also needs to determine the starting position and ending position of the PRB included in each PRG in the N PRGs corresponding to the scheduling bandwidth of the PUSCH. Two possible implementations are shown exemplarily as follows.
  • Implementation manner 1 First determine the PRG set according to the frequency hopping bandwidth of the SRS resources, and then divide each PRG set according to the number H of SRS resources indicated by the second information.
  • the scheduling bandwidth of the PUSCH includes PRB 0 , PRB 1 , . . . , PRB m , which are sequentially arranged in a certain frequency order.
  • the terminal device can sequentially determine whether the current PRB meets the limited conditions from the first PRB 0 included in the scheduling bandwidth of the PUSCH: PRB i-1 and PRB i respectively correspond to frequency hopping bandwidths of different SRS resources.
  • PRB i-1 When PRB i-1 satisfies this restriction, take PRB 0 to PRB i-1 as the first PRG set, that is, the first PRG set includes ⁇ PRB 0 , PRB 1 ,..., PRB i-1 ⁇ ; further , starting from PRB i , judge whether the current PRB satisfies the restriction condition in turn.
  • the different frequency hopping bandwidths of the SRS resources corresponding to the last PRB i-1 in the first PRG set and the first PRB i in the second PRG set that is, the last PRB i in the first PRG set -1 is the first PRB, and the first PRB i in the second PRG set is the second PRB. That is to say, starting from the first PRB 0 included in the scheduling bandwidth of PUSCH, the PRBs included in the scheduling bandwidth of PUSCH are traversed in turn. Divide into a PRG set, and continue to traverse the PRBs until the last PRB m .
  • each PRG set is further divided according to H, that is, the terminal device can determine the starting position and the ending position of the PRB included in each PRG.
  • each PRG set includes a PRBs, then the first PRGs in each PRG set are PRBs belong to the first PRG, the same as the previous PRBs next to each other PRBs belong to the second PRG, and so on; or, the first PRG in each PRG set PRBs belong to the first PRG, the same as the previous PRBs next to each other PRB is the second PRG, and so on, where, means round up, Indicates rounded down.
  • the different frequency hopping bandwidths of the SRS resources corresponding to PRB 3 and PRB 4 can be determined, so PRB 0 to PRB 3 can be determined as the first PRG Set; and so on, PRB 4 to PRB 7 can be determined as the second set of PRGs.
  • the last 2 PRBs are determined as the fourth PRG, that is, PRG3 includes PRB 6 and PRB 7 .
  • the start position and the end position of the PRB included in each PRG are directly determined.
  • the so far is the first PRG; is the second PRG, where, and Corresponding to different frequency hopping bandwidths of the SRS resources, and so on, until PRB m , N PRGs corresponding to the scheduling bandwidth of the PUSCH can be determined.
  • the first PRG is the second PRG, and so on, until PRB m , where, and Corresponds to different frequency hopping bandwidths of SRS resources.
  • the superscript of the PRB represents the PRG number
  • the subscript represents the number of the PRB within the scheduling bandwidth of the PUSCH.
  • the superscript 0 indicates the first PRG
  • the subscript 0 indicates the first PRB within the scheduling bandwidth of the PUSCH.
  • each PRG in the N PRGs corresponding to the PUSCH determined by the terminal device only corresponds to the frequency hopping bandwidth of one SRS resource, and each PRG includes consecutively numbered frequency hopping bandwidths. or number of PRBs, N hopping is the number of PRBs included in one frequency hopping bandwidth of the SRS resource, and H represents the number of SRS resources corresponding to one PUSCH transmission layer indicated by the SRI field.
  • the number of PRBs included in each of the PRG sets divided based on the first and second implementations above is not necessarily the same. The above is only for the convenience of the solution description. The number of PRBs included is the same for the example.
  • the SRS may not be sent on the frequency hopping bandwidth of some SRS resources. This is because when the frequency hopping bandwidth of the SRS resource configured by the network device is small and the system bandwidth is large, only a part of the system bandwidth detection is completed in one SRS transmission cycle, and the detection of the remaining part of the bandwidth is reserved for the subsequent (next) SRS cycle. probe. Alternatively, it may also be because the sounding bandwidth of the configured SRS resource is only a part of the system bandwidth, that is, the PUSCH may be scheduled outside the sounding bandwidth.
  • the PUSCH occupies the 1st to 10th PRBs in the system bandwidth, while the sounding bandwidth of the SRS occupies 5th-20th PRB.
  • the beamforming method adopted on the PRB of the PUSCH that does not correspond to the SRS sounding bandwidth, or the PRB of the PUSCH that does not correspond to the frequency hopping bandwidth of any SRS resource is: the beamforming method corresponding to the sixth PRB in the PUSCH
  • the sixth PRB is the PRB of the PUSCH corresponding to the frequency hopping bandwidth of the SRS and adjacent to the PUSCH that does not correspond to the frequency hopping bandwidth of any SRS resource.
  • the 5th to 10th PRBs occupied by PUSCH correspond to the sounding bandwidth of SRS
  • the 1st to 4th PRBs do not correspond to the sounding bandwidth of SRS
  • the beamforming method adopted by the 1st to 4th PRBs occupied by PUSCH is the same as that of the 1st to 4th PRBs occupied by PUSCH.
  • the 5 PRBs use the same beamforming method. In this way, it can be avoided that the beamforming mode cannot be determined on some PRBs occupied by the PUSCH.
  • the beamforming mode of the PRB occupied by the PUSCH that does not correspond to the frequency hopping bandwidth of the SRS resource is referred to the adjacent
  • the PRB of the PUSCH can improve the performance of the beamforming mode of the PRB occupied by the PUSCH that does not correspond to the frequency hopping bandwidth of the SRS resource.
  • the SRS is sent on each PRB within the frequency hopping bandwidth of the SRS resource, or, within the frequency hopping bandwidth of the SRS resource, the SRS is only sent on some PRBs, and the SRS is not sent on the remaining PRBs.
  • the actual occupied bandwidth can be called the actual frequency hopping bandwidth, see Figure 8.
  • the beamforming mode for sending the PUSCH on any one of the N PRGs included in the PUSCH is: the beamforming mode for sending the first SRS, where the first SRS The actual frequency hopping bandwidth in the frequency hopping bandwidth of the SRS resource corresponding to the PRG is occupied. In this way, it is helpful to save the SRS resource overhead and improve the reception quality of the SRS.
  • the network device may configure a threshold value through RRC signaling.
  • the terminal device determines the PRG of the PUSCH according to the relationship between the threshold value and the frequency hopping bandwidth of the SRS resource. Specifically, when the frequency hopping bandwidth of the SRS resource is greater than the threshold value, the PRG of the PUSCH may be determined according to the description of the above embodiment, and details are not repeated here. When the frequency hopping bandwidth of the SRS resource is less than the threshold value, the PRG of the PUSCH can be determined only according to the number of frequency hopping bandwidths of the SRS resource corresponding to the scheduling bandwidth of the PUSCH. At this time, the number of SRS resources indicated by the SRI field is no longer used for determination.
  • PRG is used to indicate the number of transmission layers of PUSCH.
  • the number of SRS resources indicated by the SRI field is equal to the number of transmission layers of PUSCH. That is to say, when the frequency hopping bandwidth of the SRS resource is small (for example, there are only 4 PRBs), at this time, since the PRG of the PUSCH is only determined according to the frequency hopping bandwidth of the SRS resource corresponding to the scheduling bandwidth of the PUSCH, the PRG will also be small.
  • the accuracy indicated by the beamforming method can be met; when the frequency hopping bandwidth of the SRS resource is large, if the PRG is determined only based on the frequency hopping bandwidth of the SRS resource corresponding to the scheduling bandwidth of the PUSCH, the larger PRG will not be able to satisfy the beamforming. Therefore, it is necessary to further divide the PRG according to the number of SRS resources indicated by the SRI, so as to obtain a relatively finer beamforming mode indication accuracy.
  • the scheduling bandwidth of the PUSCH may also be configured in a frequency hopping mode.
  • the PUSCH is scheduled by one DCI signaling, and it can also be considered that the PUSCH carries the same transport block.
  • PUSCH may occupy multiple time units (each time unit may include multiple consecutive OFDM symbols), and each time unit corresponds to the same frequency hopping bandwidth of PUSCH, that is, each time unit corresponds to one frequency hopping (hop), which is located in the one PUSCHs on different OFDM symbols in a time unit all occupy the same bandwidth, and PUSCHs located in different time units occupy different bandwidths.
  • hop frequency hopping
  • a method in which a network device schedules PUSCH in a frequency hopping mode is as follows: the DCI issued by the network device is used to indicate the PRB position and quantity occupied by the first PUSCH frequency hopping, and the PRB positions and quantity occupied by the remaining PUSCH frequency hopping are based on the pre- The configured offset is determined. For example, if the DCI indicates that the first PUSCH frequency hopping occupies PRB0-PRB10, and the pre-configured offset is 50, then the second PUSCH frequency hopping occupies PRB50-PRB60.
  • the frequency hopping bandwidths of different PUSCHs may correspond to the frequency hopping bandwidths of different SRS resources. For example, in FIG.
  • hop1 corresponds to the frequency hopping bandwidth of SRS resources in symbol 4
  • hop2 corresponds to SRS resources in symbol 2.
  • hopping bandwidth It should be understood that each hop includes at least one OFDM symbol for carrying a demodulation reference signal (demodulation reference signal, DMRS).
  • demodulation reference signal demodulation reference signal
  • the terminal device may jointly determine the PRG included in the scheduling bandwidth of the PUSCH according to the frequency hopping bandwidth of the PUSCH and the corresponding frequency hopping bandwidth of the SRS resource.
  • the terminal device first divides the scheduling bandwidth of the PUSCH into multiple PRG sets according to the frequency hopping bandwidth of the PUSCH, and each frequency hopping bandwidth of the PUSCH corresponds to one PRG set.
  • the terminal device determines the PRG according to the frequency hopping bandwidth of the SRS resource, that is, on the frequency hopping of each PUSCH, the solution of the present application is used to determine the PRG independently.
  • different information bits of the same transmission block may be carried on the frequency hopping of different PUSCHs.
  • the terminal device performs channel coding, modulation and layer mapping operations on the data bits according to the scheduling information to form coded and modulated data symbols, and maps the data symbols to the physical resources in the order of the frequency domain first and then the time domain. Including different PUSCH frequency hopping. In this way, it can be understood that the coded and modulated data symbols are uniformly mapped on multiple frequency hopping resources.
  • the frequency hopping of different PUSCH carries all the information bits of the same TB, that is, the same TB is repeatedly transmitted on the frequency hopping of different PUSCH.
  • the terminal device performs channel coding, modulation, and layer mapping operations on the data bits according to the scheduling information to form coded and modulated data symbols, and repeatedly maps the data symbols to each PUSCH frequency hopping resource in the order of frequency domain first and then time domain. .
  • the coded and modulated data symbols are repeatedly mapped on the frequency hopping resources for multiple times.
  • FIG. 10 it is a schematic flowchart of another communication method provided by the present application.
  • the scheduling bandwidth of the PUSCH is configured as a frequency modulation mode as an example for description.
  • the method includes the following steps:
  • Step 1001 the network device determines third information.
  • the third information is used to indicate the frequency hopping bandwidth and frequency hopping times of the PUSCH.
  • the network device may configure the frequency hopping bandwidth of the PUSCH for the terminal device.
  • the network device may configure multiple PUSCH frequency hopping bandwidths for the terminal device, and each frequency hopping bandwidth corresponds to different time domain resources and frequency domain resources.
  • One implementation of the third information is: indicating the time-frequency resources occupied by the first PUSCH frequency hopping, and the time-frequency resources occupied by the remaining PUSCH frequency hopping according to the time-frequency resources occupied by the first PUSCH frequency hopping and The preset offset is determined.
  • the time-frequency resources occupied by the first PUSCH frequency hopping may be indicated by DCI signaling, and the preset offset may be indicated by RRC signaling.
  • Step 1002 the network device sends third information to the terminal device. Accordingly, the terminal device receives the third information from the network device.
  • the terminal device may determine M PRGs corresponding to the scheduling bandwidth of the PUSCH according to the third information, where M is a positive integer.
  • each PRG in the M PRGs is a A frequency hopping bandwidth.
  • the number of PRBs occupied by one frequency hopping bandwidth of the PUSCH is the number of PRBs included in the frequency hopping bandwidth of the PUSCH. That is to say, the position of a PRB of one frequency hopping bandwidth of the PUSCH is the position of the PRB of the frequency hopping bandwidth of the PUSCH. For example, one frequency hopping bandwidth of the PUSCH occupies PRB 0 and PRB 1 , then the starting PRB of the PRB of the frequency hopping bandwidth of the PUSCH is PRB 1 , and the ending PRB is PRB 2 .
  • the terminal device needs to further follow the frequency hopping bandwidth of SRS resources indicated by the network device.
  • Determine the PRG That is, the terminal device can first divide the scheduling bandwidth of the PUSCH into multiple PRG sets according to the frequency hopping bandwidth of the PUSCH. With reference to FIG. 9 , the terminal device can divide the scheduling bandwidth of the PUSCH into two PRG sets, and for each PRG set , and further divide each PRG according to the frequency hopping bandwidth of the corresponding SRS resource.
  • the scheduling frequency hopping bandwidth of the PUSCH in the relevant description can be replaced with the corresponding PUSCH frequency hopping bandwidth. It will not be repeated here.
  • the scheduling frequency hopping bandwidth of the PUSCH in the above related description may be replaced by the frequency hopping bandwidth 1 of the PUSCH. That is, the terminal device may also receive first information from the network device, where the first information is used to indicate the frequency hopping bandwidth of the SRS resource.
  • the terminal device may also determine the PRG according to the frequency hopping bandwidth of the SRS resource and the index of the SRS resource indicated by the network device. That is, the terminal device can first divide the scheduling bandwidth of the PUSCH into multiple PRG sets according to the frequency hopping bandwidth of the PUSCH. With reference to FIG. 9 , the terminal device can divide the scheduling bandwidth of the PUSCH into two PRG sets, and for each PRG set , and further divide each PRG according to the frequency hopping bandwidth of the corresponding SRS resource and the SRS resource indicated by the SRI field.
  • the scheduling frequency hopping bandwidth of the PUSCH in the related description can be replaced with the corresponding PUSCH
  • the frequency hopping bandwidth is sufficient, and details are not repeated here.
  • the scheduling frequency hopping bandwidth of the PUSCH in the above related description can be replaced with the frequency hopping bandwidth 1 of the PUSCH; for another example, According to the same frequency hopping bandwidth of the SRS resource corresponding to the frequency hopping bandwidth 2 of the PUSCH, when each PRG can be further divided according to the SRS resource indicated by the SRI field, the scheduling frequency hopping bandwidth of the PUSCH in the above related description can be replaced
  • the frequency hopping bandwidth 2 of the PUSCH can be used. That is, the terminal device may also receive first information and second information from the network device, where the first information is used to indicate the frequency hopping bandwidth of the SRS resource, and the second information is used
  • Step 1004 the terminal device determines the beamforming mode of the PUSCH corresponding to each PRG in the M PRGs according to the frequency hopping bandwidth of the SRS resource corresponding to each frequency hopping bandwidth.
  • This step 1004 is an optional step.
  • the beamforming manner of the PUSCH corresponding to each PRG can also be understood as the beamforming manner of transmitting the PUSCH on each PRG.
  • the seventh PRG is taken as an example to describe the beamforming mode adopted on each of the M PRGs, where the seventh PRG is any one of the M PRGs.
  • the terminal device may determine the second frequency hopping bandwidth of the SRS resource corresponding to the seventh PRG, and the beamforming manner for sending the PUSCH on the seventh PRG is the beamforming manner for sending the second SRS,
  • the beamforming manner for sending the second SRS is the beamforming manner used for transmitting the SRS on the second frequency hopping bandwidth of the SRS resource.
  • the terminal device may determine the index of the SRS resource corresponding to the seventh PRG according to the SRI field indication value (second information), for example, the second SRS resource, and the terminal device may determine the second SRS resource corresponding to the seventh PRG Frequency hopping bandwidth, the beamforming mode for sending the PUSCH on the seventh PRG is the beamforming mode for sending the second SRS, wherein the beamforming mode for sending the second SRS is the second frequency hopping bandwidth of the second SRS resource.
  • the beamforming mode for sending the PUSCH on the seventh PRG is the beamforming mode for sending the second SRS
  • the beamforming mode for sending the second SRS is the second frequency hopping bandwidth of the second SRS resource
  • the seventh PRG takes PRG1 in frequency hopping bandwidth 1 of PUSCH as an example, and the second frequency hopping bandwidth corresponding to PRG1 is: SRS resource 0, SRS resource 1, SRS resource 2 and SRS resource 3 in OFDM symbol 4 Frequency hopping bandwidth, further, the index of PRG1 corresponding to the SRS resource indicated by the second information is 0 (referred to as SRS resource 0), that is to say, the beamforming mode for sending PUSCH on PRG0 is: on SRS resource 0 and on A beamforming manner for sending the second SRS on the frequency hopping bandwidth corresponding to OFDM symbol 4.
  • the SRS resource configuration can be periodic, that is, SRS may be sent on the same frequency hopping bandwidth in different periods.
  • SRS may be sent on the same frequency hopping bandwidth in different periods.
  • the present application further defines the beamforming mode adopted by the PRG, that is, the second SRS is determined as the SRS in the first SRS transmission period with the smallest time interval from the transmission moment of the SRI indication information carried in the second information.
  • the terminal device determines the beamforming mode adopted by the PRG of the PUSCH according to the beamforming mode adopted by the corresponding SRS in the period.
  • Step 1005 the terminal device sends the PUSCH according to the M PRGs.
  • step 1005 reference may be made to the introduction of the above-mentioned step 1105, which will not be repeated here.
  • the terminal device can determine the M PRGs corresponding to the scheduling bandwidth of the PUSCH according to the third information. In this way, it can ensure that the beamforming mode of each PRG is better, and the PUSCH can obtain frequency diversity gain.
  • the number of transmission layers of the PUSCH is equal to L
  • the number of the SRS resources indicated by the second indication information is H
  • the hopping frequency of the SRS resources corresponding to the frequency hopping bandwidth of the PUSCH is H.
  • the number of frequency bandwidths is P
  • the number of PRGs corresponding to one frequency hopping bandwidth of the PUSCH satisfies H ⁇ P/L
  • the H, P and L are all positive integers.
  • the number of transmission layers L of PUSCH may be determined by the terminal device according to the second information sent by the network device, or pre-agreed by the protocol. For details, please refer to the introduction of the number of transmission layers of PUSCH, that is, to replace the scheduling bandwidth of PUSCH with PUSCH The frequency hopping bandwidth is not repeated here.
  • the network device and the terminal device include corresponding hardware structures and/or software modules for performing each function.
  • the modules and method steps of each example described in conjunction with the embodiments disclosed in the present application can be implemented in the form of hardware or a combination of hardware and computer software. Whether a function is performed by hardware or computer software-driven hardware depends on the specific application scenarios and design constraints of the technical solution.
  • FIG. 11 and FIG. 12 are schematic structural diagrams of possible communication apparatuses provided by the present application. These communication apparatuses can be used to implement the functions of the terminal equipment or the network equipment in the above method embodiments, and thus can also achieve the beneficial effects of the above method embodiments.
  • the communication device may be the terminal device 102 as shown in FIG. 1 , the network device 101 as shown in FIG. 1 , or a module (such as a chip) applied to the terminal device or the network device.
  • the communication device 1100 includes a processing module 1101 and a transceiver module 1102 .
  • the communication apparatus 1100 is configured to implement the functions of the terminal device or the network device in the method embodiment shown in FIG. 6 or FIG. 10 .
  • the transceiver module 1102 is used to receive first information and second information from the second communication apparatus, where the first information is used to indicate The frequency hopping bandwidth of the sounding reference signal SRS resource, and the second information is used to indicate the index of some or all of the SRS resources in the SRS resource; the processing module 1101 is configured to determine according to the first information and the second information.
  • N PRGs corresponding to the scheduling bandwidth of the physical uplink shared channel PUSCH, where N is a positive integer; the transceiver module 1102 is further configured to send the PUSCH according to the N PRGs.
  • the processing module 1101 is used to determine first information and second information, where the first information is used to indicate a sounding reference signal SRS resource frequency hopping bandwidth, the second information is used to indicate the index of some or all of the SRS resources in the SRS resources; the transceiver module 1102 is used to send the first information and the second information, the first information and the The second information is used to determine N PRGs corresponding to the scheduling bandwidth of the physical uplink shared channel PUSCH, where N is a positive integer.
  • processing module 1101 in this embodiment of the present application may be implemented by a processor or a circuit component related to the processor, and the transceiver module 1102 may be implemented by a transceiver or a circuit component related to the transceiver.
  • the present application further provides a communication apparatus 1200 .
  • the communication device 1200 may include a processor 1201 and a transceiver 1202 .
  • the processor 1201 and the transceiver 1202 are coupled to each other.
  • the transceiver 1202 can be an interface circuit or an input-output interface.
  • the communication apparatus 1200 may further include a memory 1203 for storing instructions executed by the processor 1201 or input data required by the processor 1201 to execute the instructions or data generated after the processor 1201 executes the instructions.
  • the processor 1201 is used to execute the function of the above-mentioned processing module 1101
  • the transceiver 1202 is used to execute the function of the above-mentioned transceiver module 1102 .
  • the terminal device chip When the above communication device is a chip applied to a terminal device, the terminal device chip implements the functions of the terminal device in the above method embodiments.
  • the terminal device chip receives information from other modules (such as a radio frequency module or an antenna) in the terminal device, and the information is sent by the network device to the terminal device; or, the terminal device chip sends information to other modules (such as a radio frequency module or an antenna) in the terminal device antenna) to send information, the information is sent by the terminal equipment to the network equipment.
  • modules such as a radio frequency module or an antenna
  • the network device chip When the above communication device is a chip applied to a network device, the network device chip implements the functions of the network device in the above method embodiments.
  • the network device chip receives information from other modules (such as a radio frequency module or an antenna) in the network device, and the information is sent by the terminal device to the network device; or, the network device chip sends information to other modules in the network device (such as a radio frequency module or an antenna). antenna) to send information, the information is sent by the network equipment to the terminal equipment.
  • modules such as a radio frequency module or an antenna
  • FIG. 13 shows a schematic structural diagram of a simplified terminal device.
  • the terminal device is a mobile phone as an example.
  • the terminal device 1300 includes a processor, a memory, a radio frequency circuit, an antenna, and an input and output device.
  • the processor is mainly used to process the communication protocol and communication data, control the entire terminal device, execute software programs, and process data of the software programs, for example, to support the terminal device 1300 to execute any of the above-mentioned embodiments by the terminal device.
  • the memory is mainly used to store software programs and data.
  • the radio frequency circuit is mainly used for the conversion of the baseband signal and the radio frequency signal and the processing of the radio frequency signal.
  • Antennas are mainly used to send and receive radio frequency signals in the form of electromagnetic waves.
  • Input and output devices such as touch screens, display screens, and keyboards, are mainly used to receive data input by users and output data to users. It should be noted that some types of terminal equipment may not have input and output devices.
  • the processor can read the software program in the memory, interpret and execute the instructions of the software program, and process the data of the software program.
  • the processor performs baseband processing on the data to be sent, and outputs the baseband signal to the radio frequency circuit.
  • the radio frequency circuit performs radio frequency processing on the baseband signal and sends the radio frequency signal through the antenna in the form of electromagnetic waves.
  • the radio frequency circuit receives the radio frequency signal through the antenna, converts the radio frequency signal into a baseband signal, and outputs the baseband signal to the processor, which converts the baseband signal into data and processes the data .
  • the processor may include a baseband processor and a central processing unit.
  • the baseband processor is mainly used to process communication protocols and communication data
  • the central processing unit is mainly used to control the entire terminal device 1300.
  • the software program is executed, and the data of the software program is processed.
  • the processor in FIG. 13 integrates the functions of the baseband processor and the central processing unit.
  • the baseband processor and the central processing unit may also be independent processors, which are interconnected through technologies such as a bus.
  • the terminal device may include multiple baseband processors to adapt to different network standards
  • the terminal device 1300 may include multiple central processors to enhance its processing capability
  • various components of the terminal device 1300 may be connected through various buses.
  • the baseband processor can also be expressed as a baseband processing circuit or a baseband processing chip.
  • the central processing unit can also be expressed as a central processing circuit or a central processing chip.
  • the function of processing the communication protocol and communication data may be built in the processor, or may be stored in the storage module in the form of a software program, and the processor executes the software program to realize the baseband processing function.
  • the antenna and radio frequency circuit with a transceiver function can be regarded as the transceiver module of the terminal equipment
  • the processor with the processing function can be regarded as the processing module of the terminal equipment.
  • the terminal device includes a processing module 1301 and a transceiver module 1302 .
  • the transceiver module may also be referred to as a transceiver, a transceiver, a transceiver device, and the like
  • the processing module may also be referred to as a processor, a processing board, a processing unit, a processing device, and the like.
  • the device used for implementing the receiving function in the transceiver module may be regarded as a receiving module
  • the device used for implementing the transmitting function in the transceiver module may be regarded as a transmitting module, that is, the transceiver module includes a receiving module and a transmitting module.
  • the receiving module may also be called a receiver, a receiver, a receiving circuit, and the like
  • the sending module may be called a transmitter, a transmitter, or a transmitting circuit, and the like.
  • the downlink signal (including data and/or control information) sent by the network device is received through the antenna, and on the uplink, the uplink signal (including data) is sent to the network device or other terminal equipment through the antenna. and/or control information), in the processor, the service data and signaling messages are processed, and these modules are based on the radio access technology adopted by the radio access network (for example, LTE, NR and other evolved system access technologies) to be processed.
  • the processor is further configured to control and manage the actions of the terminal device, and to execute the processing performed by the terminal device in the above-mentioned embodiment.
  • the processor is further configured to support the terminal device to execute the execution method involving the terminal device in FIG. 6 .
  • FIG. 13 only shows one memory, one processor and one antenna.
  • the terminal device may contain any number of antennas, memories, processors, and the like.
  • the memory may also be referred to as a storage medium or a storage device or the like.
  • the memory may be set independently of the processor, or may be integrated with the processor, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
  • the transceiver module 1302 is configured to perform the sending and receiving operations on the terminal device side in the method embodiment shown in FIG. 6 above
  • the processing module 1301 is configured to perform the sending and receiving operations on the terminal device side in the method embodiment shown in FIG. 6 above. operations other than operations.
  • the transceiving module 1302 is configured to perform the transceiving steps on the terminal device side in the embodiment shown in FIG. 6 , such as step 605 .
  • the processing module 1301 is configured to perform other operations on the side of the terminal device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 6 except for the transceiving operation, such as step 603 and step 604 .
  • the communication device may include a transceiver module and a processing module.
  • the transceiver module may be an input/output circuit and/or an interface circuit;
  • the processing module may be a processor, a microprocessor or an integrated circuit integrated on the chip.
  • FIG. 14 exemplarily shows a schematic structural diagram of a network device provided by the present application.
  • the network device 1400 may include one or more radio frequency units, such as a remote radio unit (remote radio unit, RRU) 1402 and one or more baseband units (baseband unit, BBU) 1401.
  • the RRU 1402 may be referred to as a transceiver module, a transceiver, a transceiver circuit, or a transceiver, etc., and may include at least one antenna 14021 and a radio frequency unit 14022 .
  • the RRU1402 part is mainly used for the transceiver of radio frequency signals and the conversion of radio frequency signals and baseband signals.
  • the BBU1401 part can be called a processing module, a processor, etc. It is mainly used for baseband processing, such as channel coding, multiplexing, modulation, spread spectrum, etc., and is also used to control network equipment.
  • the RRU 1402 and the BBU 1401 may be physically set together; they may also be physically separated, that is, a distributed network device.
  • the BBU 1401 is the control center of the base station, and can also be called a processing module, which can correspond to the processing module 1201 in FIG. 12 , and is mainly used to complete baseband processing functions, such as channel coding, multiplexing, modulation, spread spectrum, and the like.
  • the BBU processing module
  • the BBU may be used to control the base station to perform the operation procedure of the network device in the above method embodiments, for example, to determine the first information and the second information.
  • the BBU1401 can be composed of one or more boards. Multiple boards can jointly support a wireless access network (such as LTE network) of a single access standard, or can support different access standards respectively. wireless access network (such as LTE network, 5G network or other networks).
  • the BBU 1401 also includes a memory 14012 and a processor 14011.
  • Memory 14012 is used to store necessary instructions and data.
  • the processor 14011 is configured to control the network device to perform necessary actions, for example, to control the network device to perform the method performed by the network device in any of the foregoing embodiments.
  • Memory 14012 and processor 14011 may serve one or more single boards. That is to say, the memory and processor can be provided separately on each single board. It can also be that multiple boards share the same memory and processor. In addition, necessary circuits are also provided on each single board.
  • the uplink signal (including data, etc.) sent by the terminal device is received through the antenna 14021, and on the downlink, the downlink signal (including data and/or control information) is sent to the terminal device through the antenna 14021.
  • the service data and signaling messages are processed, and these modules are processed according to the radio access technology adopted by the radio access network (eg, LTE, NR, and other access technologies of evolved systems).
  • the processor 14011 is further configured to control and manage the actions of the network device, and is configured to execute the processing performed by the network device in the foregoing embodiments.
  • the processor 14011 is further configured to support the network device to perform the method performed by the network device in FIG. 6 .
  • FIG. 14 only shows a simplified design of the network device.
  • a network device may include any number of antennas, memories, processors, radio frequency units, RRUs, BBUs, etc., and all network devices that can implement the present application are within the protection scope of the present application.
  • the transceiver module 1402 is configured to perform the sending and receiving operations on the network device side in the method embodiment shown in FIG. 6 above, and the processing module 1401 is configured to perform the network device side in the method embodiment shown in FIG. 6 above. operations other than operations.
  • the transceiving module 1402 is configured to perform transceiving steps on the network device side in the embodiment shown in FIG. 6 , such as step 602 .
  • the processing module 1401 is configured to perform other operations on the network device side in the embodiment shown in FIG. 6 except for the transceiving operation, for example, step 601 .
  • processor in the embodiments of the present application may be a central processing unit (central processing unit, CPU), and may also be other general-purpose processors, digital signal processors (digital signal processors, DSP), application-specific integrated circuits (application specific integrated circuit, ASIC), field programmable gate array (field programmable gate array, FPGA) or other programmable logic devices, transistor logic devices, hardware components or any combination thereof.
  • CPU central processing unit
  • DSP digital signal processors
  • ASIC application specific integrated circuit
  • FPGA field programmable gate array
  • a general-purpose processor may be a microprocessor or any conventional processor.
  • the method steps in the embodiments of the present application may be implemented in a hardware manner, or may be implemented in a manner in which a processor executes software instructions.
  • Software instructions can be composed of corresponding software modules, and software modules can be stored in random access memory (RAM), flash memory, read-only memory (ROM), programmable read-only memory (programmable ROM) , PROM), erasable programmable read-only memory (erasable PROM, EPROM), electrically erasable programmable read-only memory (electrically EPROM, EEPROM), registers, hard disks, removable hard disks, CD-ROMs or known in the art in any other form of storage medium.
  • An exemplary storage medium is coupled to the processor, such that the processor can read information from, and write information to, the storage medium.
  • the storage medium can also be an integral part of the processor.
  • the processor and storage medium may reside in an ASIC.
  • the ASIC may be located in a network device or in an end device.
  • the processor and the storage medium may also exist in the network device or the terminal device as discrete components.
  • the above-mentioned embodiments it may be implemented in whole or in part by software, hardware, firmware or any combination thereof.
  • software it can be implemented in whole or in part in the form of a computer program product.
  • the computer program product includes one or more computer programs or instructions.
  • the processes or functions described in the embodiments of the present application are executed in whole or in part.
  • the computer may be a general purpose computer, a special purpose computer, a computer network, network equipment, user equipment, or other programmable apparatus.
  • the computer program or instructions may be stored in a computer-readable storage medium or transmitted from one computer-readable storage medium to another computer-readable storage medium, for example, the computer program or instructions may be downloaded from a website site, computer, A server or data center transmits by wire or wireless to another website site, computer, server or data center.
  • the computer-readable storage medium may be any available medium that can be accessed by a computer, or a data storage device such as a server, data center, or the like that integrates one or more available media.
  • the usable medium can be a magnetic medium, such as a floppy disk, a hard disk, and a magnetic tape; it can also be an optical medium, such as a digital video disc (DVD); it can also be a semiconductor medium, such as a solid state drive (solid state drive). , SSD).
  • a magnetic medium such as a floppy disk, a hard disk, and a magnetic tape
  • an optical medium such as a digital video disc (DVD)
  • DVD digital video disc
  • it can also be a semiconductor medium, such as a solid state drive (solid state drive). , SSD).
  • “at least one” means one or more, and “plurality” means two or more.
  • “And/or”, which describes the association relationship of the associated objects, indicates that there can be three kinds of relationships, for example, A and/or B, which can indicate: the existence of A alone, the existence of A and B at the same time, and the existence of B alone, where A, B can be singular or plural.
  • the character “/” generally indicates that the related objects are a kind of "or” relationship; in the formula of this application, the character “/” indicates that the related objects are a kind of "division” Relationship.
  • the word “exemplary” is used to mean serving as an example, illustration, or illustration. Any embodiment or design described in this application as "exemplary” should not be construed as preferred or advantageous over other embodiments or designs. Alternatively, it can be understood that the use of the word example is intended to present concepts in a specific manner, and not to limit the application.

Abstract

A communication method and apparatus, which are used for solving the problem in the prior art of relatively high signaling overheads caused due to there being a large number of fields of a PRG for indicating a scheduling bandwidth of a PUSCH. In the present application, the method comprises: a terminal device receiving, from a network device, first information for indicating frequency hopping bandwidths of SRS resources, and second information for indicating indexes of some or all of the SRS resources; according to the first information and the second information, determining N PRGs corresponding to a scheduling bandwidth of a PUSCH; and sending the PUSCH according to the N PRGs, N being a positive integer. PRGs determined by means of frequency hopping bandwidths of SRS resources and indexes of the SRS resources are relatively accurate, thereby facilitating the improvement of the accuracy of the determined PRGs, and as such facilitating the improvement of the transmission performance of a PUSCH and reducing signaling overheads.

Description

一种通信方法及装置A communication method and device
相关申请的交叉引用CROSS-REFERENCE TO RELATED APPLICATIONS
本申请要求在2020年08月13日提交中国专利局、申请号为202010811997.4、申请名称为“一种通信方法及装置”的中国专利申请的优先权,其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中。This application claims the priority of the Chinese patent application with the application number 202010811997.4 and the application title "a communication method and device" filed with the China Patent Office on August 13, 2020, the entire contents of which are incorporated into this application by reference.
技术领域technical field
本申请涉及通信技术领域,尤其涉及一种通信方法及装置。The present application relates to the field of communication technologies, and in particular, to a communication method and apparatus.
背景技术Background technique
新空口(new radio,NR)中支持的物理上行共享信道(physical uplink shared channel,PUSCH)传输模式包括基于码本的传输模式和基于非码本的传输模式。基于码本的传输模式是指基站从预先定义的码本中指示PUSCH的传输预编码指示(transmmit precoding Matrix indicator,TPMI),UE根据指示的TPMI发送PUSCH。基于非码本的传输模式是利用上下行信道的互易性,终端设备根据下行信道测量结果确定发送上行信号(如PUSCH)所采用的波束赋形方式,例如,预编码。The physical uplink shared channel (PUSCH) transmission modes supported in the new radio interface (NR) include a codebook-based transmission mode and a non-codebook-based transmission mode. The codebook-based transmission mode means that the base station indicates the transmission precoding indicator (transmmit precoding Matrix indicator, TPMI) of the PUSCH from a predefined codebook, and the UE sends the PUSCH according to the indicated TPMI. The non-codebook-based transmission mode utilizes the reciprocity of the uplink and downlink channels, and the terminal device determines the beamforming mode, such as precoding, used to transmit the uplink signal (eg, PUSCH) according to the downlink channel measurement result.
目前,以采用的波束赋形方式为预编码为例,基于非码本的传输模式的具体过程为:基站向用户设备(user equipment,UE)下发下行参考信号或者下行信道,UE可根据接收到的下行信号或下行信道获取信道协方差矩阵,利用信道协方差矩阵可获得适配信道的预编码(例如可以是奇异值分解(singular value decomposition,SVD)获得的特征值向量)。UE分别在不同SRS资源上采用对应的预编码发送探测参考信号(sounding reference signal,SRS)。基站对在不同SRS资源上的发送的SRS进行测量,从多个SRS资源中选择部分SRS资源,并将选择的SRS资源指示给UE,UE根据指示的SRS资源对应的预编码向基站发送PUSCH。At present, taking the beamforming method as precoding as an example, the specific process of the non-codebook-based transmission mode is as follows: the base station sends a downlink reference signal or downlink channel to a user equipment (UE), and the UE can receive a downlink reference signal or a downlink channel according to the received data. The obtained downlink signal or downlink channel obtains the channel covariance matrix, and the channel covariance matrix is used to obtain the precoding of the adapted channel (for example, it may be an eigenvalue vector obtained by singular value decomposition (SVD)). The UE transmits a sounding reference signal (SRS) using corresponding precoding on different SRS resources respectively. The base station measures the SRS sent on different SRS resources, selects some SRS resources from multiple SRS resources, and indicates the selected SRS resources to the UE, and the UE sends the PUSCH to the base station according to the precoding corresponding to the indicated SRS resources.
现有技术中,对于频率选择性较为严重的PUSCH传输信道条件,可以定义PUSCH对应多个预编码资源块组(precoding resource group,PRG),一个PRG采用一个预编码。每个PRG的预编码可以通过一个SRI字段指示。如图1所示,PUSCH 1的调度指示中包括两个SRS资源指示(SRS resource indication,SRI)字段,即PUSCH对应两个PRG,SRI-1字段用于指示PRG 1的预编码,SRI-2字段用于指示PRG 2的预编码;PUSCH 2的调度指示DCI中包括四个SRI字段,即PUSCH对应四个PRG,SRI-1字段对应PRG1,SRI-2字段对应PRG2,SRI-3字段对应PRG3,SRI-4字段对应PRG4,即SRI-1字段用于指示PRG1的预编码,SRI-2字段用于指示PRG2的预编码,SRI-3字段用于指示PRG3的预编码,SRI-4字段用于指示PRG4的预编码。但是,当PUSCH的调度带宽较大时,为了保证PUSCH较优的传输性能,需要较多的SRI字段进行指示,从而会增加信令开销。通常,SRI字段会承载于下行控制信息(downlink control information,DCI)中,增加DCI开销会严重影响网络的下行覆盖性能。In the prior art, for PUSCH transmission channel conditions with severe frequency selectivity, it may be defined that PUSCH corresponds to multiple precoding resource groups (precoding resource groups, PRGs), and one PRG uses one precoding. The precoding of each PRG can be indicated by an SRI field. As shown in Figure 1, the scheduling indication of PUSCH 1 includes two SRS resource indication (SRS resource indication, SRI) fields, that is, PUSCH corresponds to two PRGs, the SRI-1 field is used to indicate the precoding of PRG 1, and the SRI-2 field is used to indicate the precoding of PRG 1. The field is used to indicate the precoding of PRG 2; the scheduling indication DCI of PUSCH 2 includes four SRI fields, that is, the PUSCH corresponds to four PRGs, the SRI-1 field corresponds to PRG1, the SRI-2 field corresponds to PRG2, and the SRI-3 field corresponds to PRG3 , the SRI-4 field corresponds to PRG4, that is, the SRI-1 field is used to indicate the precoding of PRG1, the SRI-2 field is used to indicate the precoding of PRG2, the SRI-3 field is used to indicate the precoding of PRG3, and the SRI-4 field is used to indicate the precoding of PRG3. to indicate precoding of PRG4. However, when the scheduling bandwidth of the PUSCH is large, in order to ensure better transmission performance of the PUSCH, more SRI fields are required for indication, which increases signaling overhead. Usually, the SRI field is carried in downlink control information (downlink control information, DCI), and increasing the DCI overhead will seriously affect the downlink coverage performance of the network.
发明内容SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION
本申请提供一种通信方法及装置,用于提高PUSCH的传输性能且可减少信令开销。The present application provides a communication method and apparatus for improving PUSCH transmission performance and reducing signaling overhead.
第一方面,本申请提供一种通信方法,该方法包括第一通信装置接收来自第二通信装置的第一信息和第二信息,根据所述第一信息和所述第二信息,确定PUSCH的调度带宽对应的N个PRG,根据所述N个PRG发送所述PUSCH,其中,所述N为正整数,所述第一信息用于指示SRS资源的跳频带宽,所述第二信息用于指示所述SRS资源中部分或者全部SRS资源的索引。In a first aspect, the present application provides a communication method. The method includes a first communication device receiving first information and second information from a second communication device, and determining a PUSCH according to the first information and the second information. N PRGs corresponding to the scheduling bandwidth, the PUSCH is sent according to the N PRGs, where the N is a positive integer, the first information is used to indicate the frequency hopping bandwidth of the SRS resource, and the second information is used to An index indicating part or all of the SRS resources in the SRS resources.
该方法中的第一通信装置可以是终端设备,或终端设备中的模块,例如芯片。The first communication device in the method may be a terminal device, or a module in the terminal device, such as a chip.
基于上述方案,PUSCH的调度带宽对应的N个PRG是根据SRS资源的跳频带宽和第二信息指示的SRS资源的索引确定的,如此,可以使得确定出的PRG较为准确,从而可在DCI开销不增加的前提下,确保每个PRG的波束赋形方式尽可能是最优的,从而可提升PUSCH的传输性能。Based on the above solution, the N PRGs corresponding to the scheduling bandwidth of the PUSCH are determined according to the frequency hopping bandwidth of the SRS resource and the index of the SRS resource indicated by the second information. In this way, the determined PRG can be more accurate, so that the DCI overhead can be reduced. Under the premise of not increasing, it is ensured that the beamforming mode of each PRG is as optimal as possible, thereby improving the transmission performance of PUSCH.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述N个PRG中每个PRG对应所述SRS资源的一个跳频带宽。In a possible implementation manner, each PRG in the N PRGs corresponds to a frequency hopping bandwidth of the SRS resource.
在一种可能的实现方式中,N个PRG中存在两个PRG之间满足以下关系1和/或关系2。In a possible implementation manner, the following relation 1 and/or relation 2 is satisfied between two PRGs in the N PRGs.
关系1,以N个PRG中频域上相邻的两个PRG为第一PRG和第二PRG为例,第一PRG中频率最低的PRB与第二PRG中频率最高的PRB分别对应所述SRS资源的不同跳频带宽,所述第一PRG中频率最低的PRB与所述第二PRG中频率最高的PRB为所述PUSCH的调度带宽上相邻的两个PRB。 Relation 1, taking two PRGs that are adjacent in the frequency domain among the N PRGs as the first PRG and the second PRG as an example, the PRB with the lowest frequency in the first PRG and the PRB with the highest frequency in the second PRG respectively correspond to the SRS resources different frequency hopping bandwidths, the PRB with the lowest frequency in the first PRG and the PRB with the highest frequency in the second PRG are two adjacent PRBs on the scheduling bandwidth of the PUSCH.
或者,第一PRG中频率最高的PRB与第二PRG中频率最低的PRB分别对应所述SRS资源的不同跳频带宽,所述第一PRG中频率最高的PRB与所述第二PRG中频率最低的PRB为所述PUSCH的调度带宽上相邻的两个PRB。Alternatively, the PRB with the highest frequency in the first PRG and the PRB with the lowest frequency in the second PRG respectively correspond to different frequency hopping bandwidths of the SRS resource, and the PRB with the highest frequency in the first PRG and the PRB with the lowest frequency in the second PRG respectively correspond to different frequency hopping bandwidths of the SRS resource. The PRBs are two adjacent PRBs on the scheduling bandwidth of the PUSCH.
关系2,以N个PRG中对应同一个SRS资源的跳频带宽的任意两个PRG为第三PRG和所述第四PRG为例,第三PRG和第四PRG对应所述SRS资源的同一个跳频带宽,且所述第三PRG和所述第四PRG对应所述第二信息指示的SRS资源的索引不同。Relation 2, taking any two PRGs of the N PRGs corresponding to the frequency hopping bandwidth of the same SRS resource as the third PRG and the fourth PRG as an example, the third PRG and the fourth PRG correspond to the same one of the SRS resources A frequency hopping bandwidth, and the indexes of the third PRG and the fourth PRG corresponding to the SRS resources indicated by the second information are different.
以所述N个PRG中的任一个为第五PRG为例,所述第一通信装置确定第五PRG对应的所述SRS资源的第一跳频带宽,在所述第五PRG上发送所述PUSCH的波束赋形方式为发送第一SRS的波束赋形方式,发送第一SRS的波束赋形方式为在第一SRS资源的第一跳频带宽上发送SRS采用的波束赋形方式,其中,所述第一SRS承载于第一SRS资源的第一跳频带宽上,所述第一SRS资源的索引为所述第二信息指示的部分或全部SRS的资源索引。Taking any one of the N PRGs as a fifth PRG as an example, the first communication device determines a first frequency hopping bandwidth of the SRS resource corresponding to the fifth PRG, and sends the fifth PRG on the fifth PRG. The beamforming mode of the PUSCH is the beamforming mode for sending the first SRS, and the beamforming mode for sending the first SRS is the beamforming mode used for sending the SRS on the first frequency hopping bandwidth of the first SRS resource, wherein, The first SRS is carried on the first frequency hopping bandwidth of the first SRS resource, and the index of the first SRS resource is the resource index of part or all of the SRS indicated by the second information.
通过上述方法,在不同PRG上发送PUSCH的波束赋形方式是根据在对应的SRS资源和相应跳频带宽上发送SRS所采用的波束赋形方式确定的,如此,可确保不同PRG的波束赋形方式是不同的,且较为适配上行传输的信道,从而可提升PUSCH的传输性能。Through the above method, the beamforming mode for sending PUSCH on different PRGs is determined according to the beamforming mode used for sending SRS on the corresponding SRS resources and the corresponding frequency hopping bandwidth. In this way, the beamforming mode of different PRGs can be ensured. The methods are different, and are more suitable for the channel of uplink transmission, so that the transmission performance of the PUSCH can be improved.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述第一SRS的传输为与发送所述第二信息的时域间隔最小的一次SRS传输。In a possible implementation manner, the transmission of the first SRS is an SRS transmission with the smallest time domain interval from sending the second information.
通过上述方式,确定出的每个PRG的波束赋形方式尽可能是最优的。In the above manner, the determined beamforming manner of each PRG is as optimal as possible.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述第二信息包括探测参考信号指示(sounding reference signal indication,SRI)。In a possible implementation manner, the second information includes a sounding reference signal indication (sounding reference signal indication, SRI).
在一种可能的实现方式中,当所述PUSCH的传输层数等于L,所述N满足H×K/L,所述H为所述第二指示信息指示的所述SRS资源的数量,所述K为所述PUSCH的调度带宽对应的SRS资源的跳频带宽的数量,所述H、K和L均为正整数。In a possible implementation manner, when the number of transmission layers of the PUSCH is equal to L, the N satisfies H×K/L, the H is the number of the SRS resources indicated by the second indication information, and the The K is the number of frequency hopping bandwidths of the SRS resources corresponding to the scheduling bandwidth of the PUSCH, and the H, K and L are all positive integers.
第二方面,本申请提供一种通信方法,该方法包括第一通信装置接收来自第二通信装置的第三信息,根据所述第三信息,确定所述PUSCH的调度带宽对应的M个PRG,根据所述M个PRG发送所述PUSCH,其中,M为正整数,所述第三信息用于指示PUSCH的跳频带宽和跳频次数。In a second aspect, the present application provides a communication method. The method includes a first communication device receiving third information from a second communication device, and determining M PRGs corresponding to the scheduling bandwidth of the PUSCH according to the third information, The PUSCH is sent according to the M PRGs, where M is a positive integer, and the third information is used to indicate the frequency hopping bandwidth and frequency hopping times of the PUSCH.
基于上述方案,可根据第三信息确定PUSCH的调度带宽对应的M个PRG,如此,可以确保每个PRG的波束赋形方式较优,且PUSCH可以获得频率分集增益。Based on the above solution, M PRGs corresponding to the scheduling bandwidth of the PUSCH can be determined according to the third information. In this way, the beamforming mode of each PRG can be ensured to be optimal, and the PUSCH can obtain frequency diversity gain.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述M个PRG中每个PRG对应所述PUSCH的一个跳频带宽。In a possible implementation manner, each PRG in the M PRGs corresponds to a frequency hopping bandwidth of the PUSCH.
当PUSCH的一个跳频带宽对应SRS资源的多个跳频带宽时,所述第一通信装置还可接收来自所述第二通信装置的第一信息,所述第一信息用于SRS资源的跳频带宽;When one frequency hopping bandwidth of the PUSCH corresponds to multiple frequency hopping bandwidths of the SRS resources, the first communication device may further receive first information from the second communication device, where the first information is used for hopping the SRS resources frequency bandwidth;
进一步,可选地,所述第一通信装置根据所述第三信息和所述第一信息,确定所述PUSCH的调度带宽对应的M个PRG,其中,所述M个PRG中的每个PRG对应所述SRS资源的一个跳频带宽。Further, optionally, the first communication apparatus determines M PRGs corresponding to the scheduling bandwidth of the PUSCH according to the third information and the first information, wherein each PRG in the M PRGs A frequency hopping bandwidth corresponding to the SRS resource.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述第一通信装置还可接收来自所述第二通信装置的第一信息和第二信息,所述第一信息用于指示SRS资源的跳频带宽,所述第二信息用于指示所述SRS资源中部分或者全部SRS资源的索引;In a possible implementation manner, the first communication device may further receive first information and second information from the second communication device, where the first information is used to indicate the frequency hopping bandwidth of the SRS resource, so The second information is used to indicate the index of some or all of the SRS resources in the SRS resources;
进一步,可选地,所述第一通信装置根据所述第三信息、所述第一信息和所述第二信息,确定所述PUSCH的调度带宽对应的M个PRG,其中,所述M个PRG中的每个PRG对应所述SRS资源的一个跳频带宽。Further, optionally, the first communication apparatus determines M PRGs corresponding to the scheduling bandwidth of the PUSCH according to the third information, the first information and the second information, wherein the M PRGs Each PRG in the PRG corresponds to a frequency hopping bandwidth of the SRS resource.
在一种可能的实现方式中,第一PRG中频率最低的PRB与第二PRG中频率最高的PRB分别对应所述SRS资源的不同跳频带宽;其中,所述第一PRG和所述第二PRG为所述M个PRG中频域上相邻的两个PRG,所述第一PRG中频率最低的PRB与所述第二PRG中频率最高的PRB为所述PUSCH的调度带宽的同一个跳频带宽上相邻的两个PRB。In a possible implementation manner, the PRB with the lowest frequency in the first PRG and the PRB with the highest frequency in the second PRG respectively correspond to different frequency hopping bandwidths of the SRS resource; wherein, the first PRG and the second PRG PRGs are two adjacent PRGs in the frequency domain among the M PRGs, and the PRB with the lowest frequency in the first PRG and the PRB with the highest frequency in the second PRG are the same frequency hopping of the scheduling bandwidth of the PUSCH Two PRBs that are adjacent in bandwidth.
在一种可能的实现方式中,第一PRG中频率最高的PRB与第二PRG中频率最低的PRB分别对应所述SRS资源的不同跳频带宽;其中,所述第一PRG和所述第二PRG为所述M个PRG中频域上相邻的两个PRG,所述第一PRG中频率最高的PRB与所述第二PRG中频率最低的PRB为所述PUSCH的调度带宽的同一个跳频带宽上相邻的两个PRB。In a possible implementation manner, the PRB with the highest frequency in the first PRG and the PRB with the lowest frequency in the second PRG respectively correspond to different frequency hopping bandwidths of the SRS resource; PRGs are two adjacent PRGs in the frequency domain among the M PRGs, and the PRB with the highest frequency in the first PRG and the PRB with the lowest frequency in the second PRG are the same frequency hopping of the scheduling bandwidth of the PUSCH Two PRBs that are adjacent in bandwidth.
在一种可能的实现方式中,第三PRG和第四PRG对应所述SRS资源的同一个跳频带宽,且所述第三PRG和所述第四PRG对应所述第二信息指示的SRS资源的索引不同;其中,所述第三PRG和所述第四PRG为所述M个PRG中任意两个PRG。In a possible implementation manner, the third PRG and the fourth PRG correspond to the same frequency hopping bandwidth of the SRS resource, and the third PRG and the fourth PRG correspond to the SRS resource indicated by the second information The indexes of are different; wherein, the third PRG and the fourth PRG are any two PRGs in the M PRGs.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述第一通信装置确定第五PRG对应的所述SRS资源的第一跳频带宽,在所述第五PRG上发送所述PUSCH的波束赋形方式为发送第一SRS的波束赋形方式,其中,所述第五PRG为所述M个PRG中的任一个;所述第一SRS承载于第一SRS资源的第一跳频带宽上,所述第一SRS的资源索引为所述第二信息指示的部分或全部SRS的资源索引。In a possible implementation manner, the first communication apparatus determines a first frequency hopping bandwidth of the SRS resource corresponding to the fifth PRG, and the beamforming manner for sending the PUSCH on the fifth PRG is to send The beamforming mode of the first SRS, wherein the fifth PRG is any one of the M PRGs; the first SRS is carried on the first frequency hopping bandwidth of the first SRS resource, and the first The resource index of the SRS is the resource index of part or all of the SRS indicated by the second information.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述第一SRS的传输为与发送所述第二信息的时域间隔最小的一次SRS传输。In a possible implementation manner, the transmission of the first SRS is an SRS transmission with the smallest time domain interval from sending the second information.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述第二信息包括SRI。In a possible implementation manner, the second information includes SRI.
在一种可能的实现方式中,当所述PUSCH的传输层数等于L,所述PUSCH的跳频带宽对应的PRG的数量满足H×P/L,所述H为所述第二指示信息指示的所述SRS资源的数量,所述P为所述PUSCH的跳频带宽对应的SRS资源的跳频带宽的数量,所述H、P和L均为正整数。In a possible implementation manner, when the number of transmission layers of the PUSCH is equal to L, the number of PRGs corresponding to the frequency hopping bandwidth of the PUSCH satisfies H×P/L, and the H is the indication of the second indication information The number of the SRS resources, the P is the number of frequency hopping bandwidths of the SRS resources corresponding to the frequency hopping bandwidth of the PUSCH, and the H, P and L are all positive integers.
第三方面,本申请提供一种通信方法,该方法包括第二通信装置确定第一信息和第二信息,向第一通信装置发送所述第一信息和所述第二信息,所述第一信息用于指示SRS资源的跳频带宽,所述第二信息用于指示所述SRS资源中部分或者全部SRS资源的索引;所述第一信息和所述第二信息用于确定PUSCH的调度带宽对应的N个PRG,所述N为正整数。In a third aspect, the present application provides a communication method. The method includes a second communication device determining first information and second information, and sending the first information and the second information to the first communication device, the first information and the second information being sent to the first communication device. The information is used to indicate the frequency hopping bandwidth of the SRS resource, and the second information is used to indicate the index of some or all of the SRS resources in the SRS resource; the first information and the second information are used to determine the scheduling bandwidth of the PUSCH The corresponding N PRGs, where N is a positive integer.
该方法中的第二通信装置可以是网络设备,或网络设备中的模块,例如芯片。The second communication device in the method may be a network device, or a module in the network device, such as a chip.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述N个PRG中每个PRG对应所述SRS资源的一个跳频带宽。In a possible implementation manner, each PRG in the N PRGs corresponds to a frequency hopping bandwidth of the SRS resource.
在一种可能的实现方式中,第一PRG中频率最低的PRB与第二PRG中频率最高的PRB分别对应所述SRS资源的不同跳频带宽;其中,所述第一PRG和所述第二PRG为所述N个PRG中频域上相邻的两个PRG,所述第一PRG中频率最低的PRB与所述第二PRG中频率最高的PRB为所述PUSCH的调度带宽上相邻的两个PRB。In a possible implementation manner, the PRB with the lowest frequency in the first PRG and the PRB with the highest frequency in the second PRG respectively correspond to different frequency hopping bandwidths of the SRS resource; wherein, the first PRG and the second PRG PRGs are two adjacent PRGs in the frequency domain among the N PRGs, and the PRB with the lowest frequency in the first PRG and the PRB with the highest frequency in the second PRG are the two adjacent PRGs in the scheduling bandwidth of the PUSCH. PRBs.
在一种可能的实现方式中,第一PRG中频率最高的PRB与第二PRG中频率最低的PRB分别对应所述SRS资源的不同跳频带宽;其中,所述第一PRG和所述第二PRG为所述N个PRG中频域上相邻的两个PRG,所述第一PRG中频率最高的PRB与所述第二PRG中频率最低的PRB为所述PUSCH的调度带宽上相邻的两个PRB。In a possible implementation manner, the PRB with the highest frequency in the first PRG and the PRB with the lowest frequency in the second PRG respectively correspond to different frequency hopping bandwidths of the SRS resource; PRGs are two adjacent PRGs in the frequency domain in the N PRGs, and the PRB with the highest frequency in the first PRG and the PRB with the lowest frequency in the second PRG are the two adjacent PRGs in the scheduling bandwidth of the PUSCH PRBs.
在一种可能的实现方式中,第三PRG和第四PRG对应所述SRS资源的同一个跳频带宽,且所述第三PRG和所述第四PRG对应所述第二信息指示的SRS资源的索引不同;其中,所述第三PRG和所述第四PRG为所述N个PRG中任意两个PRG。In a possible implementation manner, the third PRG and the fourth PRG correspond to the same frequency hopping bandwidth of the SRS resource, and the third PRG and the fourth PRG correspond to the SRS resource indicated by the second information The indexes of are different; wherein, the third PRG and the fourth PRG are any two PRGs in the N PRGs.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述第二信息包括SRI。In a possible implementation manner, the second information includes SRI.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述第二通信装置向所述第一通信装置发送所述PUSCH的传输层数L;其中,所述N满足H×K/L,所述H为所述第二指示信息指示的所述SRS资源的数量,所述K为所述PUSCH的调度带宽对应的SRS资源的跳频带宽的数量,所述H、K和L均为正整数。In a possible implementation manner, the second communication apparatus sends the number of transmission layers L of the PUSCH to the first communication apparatus; wherein, the N satisfies H×K/L, and the H is the The number of the SRS resources indicated by the second indication information, the K is the number of frequency hopping bandwidths of the SRS resources corresponding to the scheduling bandwidth of the PUSCH, and the H, K and L are all positive integers.
第三方面的有益效果可参见上述第一方面的描述,此处不再赘述。For the beneficial effects of the third aspect, reference may be made to the description of the above-mentioned first aspect, which will not be repeated here.
第四方面,本申请提供一种通信方法,该方法包括第二通信装置确定第三信息,并向第一通信装置发送所述第三信息,所述第三信息用于指示PUSCH的跳频带宽和跳频次数;第三信息用于所述第一通信装置确定PUSCH的调度带宽对应的M个PRG,所述M为正整数。In a fourth aspect, the present application provides a communication method, the method includes the second communication device determining third information, and sending the third information to the first communication device, where the third information is used to indicate the frequency hopping bandwidth of the PUSCH and the number of frequency hopping; the third information is used by the first communication apparatus to determine M PRGs corresponding to the scheduling bandwidth of the PUSCH, where M is a positive integer.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述M个PRG中每个PRG对应所述PUSCH的一个跳频带宽。In a possible implementation manner, each PRG in the M PRGs corresponds to a frequency hopping bandwidth of the PUSCH.
在一种可能的实现方式中,第二通信装置确定第一信息,所述第一信息用于指示探测参考信号SRS资源的跳频带宽;所述第二通信装置向所述第一通信装置发送所述第一信息,所述第一信息和所述第三信息用于所述第一通信装置确定所述PUSCH的调度带宽对应的M个PRG,其中,所述M个PRG中的每个PRG对应所述SRS资源的一个跳频带宽。In a possible implementation manner, the second communication apparatus determines first information, where the first information is used to indicate the frequency hopping bandwidth of the sounding reference signal SRS resource; the second communication apparatus sends to the first communication apparatus The first information, the first information and the third information are used by the first communication apparatus to determine M PRGs corresponding to the scheduling bandwidth of the PUSCH, wherein each PRG in the M PRGs A frequency hopping bandwidth corresponding to the SRS resource.
在一种可能的实现方式中,第二通信装置确定第一信息和第二信息,所述第一信息用于指示探测参考信号SRS资源的跳频带宽,所述第二信息用于指示所述SRS资源中部分或者全部SRS资源的索引;所述第二通信装置向所述第一通信装置发送所述第一信息和所述第二信息,所述第一信息、所述第二信息和所述第三信息用于所述第一通信装置确定所述PUSCH的调度带宽对应的M个PRG,其中,所述M个PRG中的每个PRG对应所述SRS资源的一个跳频带宽。In a possible implementation manner, the second communication apparatus determines first information and second information, where the first information is used to indicate a frequency hopping bandwidth of a sounding reference signal SRS resource, and the second information is used to indicate the The index of part or all of the SRS resources in the SRS resources; the second communication device sends the first information and the second information to the first communication device, the first information, the second information and the The third information is used by the first communication apparatus to determine M PRGs corresponding to the scheduling bandwidth of the PUSCH, wherein each PRG in the M PRGs corresponds to a frequency hopping bandwidth of the SRS resource.
在一种可能的实现方式中,第一PRG中频率最低的PRB与第二PRG中频率最高的PRB分别对应所述SRS资源的不同跳频带宽;其中,所述第一PRG和所述第二PRG为所述M个PRG中频域上相邻的两个PRG,所述第一PRG中频率最低的PRB与所述第二PRG中频率最高的PRB为所述PUSCH的调度带宽的同一个跳频带宽上相邻的两个PRB。In a possible implementation manner, the PRB with the lowest frequency in the first PRG and the PRB with the highest frequency in the second PRG respectively correspond to different frequency hopping bandwidths of the SRS resource; wherein, the first PRG and the second PRG PRGs are two adjacent PRGs in the frequency domain among the M PRGs, and the PRB with the lowest frequency in the first PRG and the PRB with the highest frequency in the second PRG are the same frequency hopping of the scheduling bandwidth of the PUSCH Two PRBs that are adjacent in bandwidth.
在一种可能的实现方式中,第一PRG中频率最高的PRB与第二PRG中频率最低的PRB分别对应所述SRS资源的不同跳频带宽;其中,所述第一PRG和所述第二PRG为所述M个PRG中频域上相邻的两个PRG,所述第一PRG中频率最高的PRB与所述第二PRG中频率最低的PRB为所述PUSCH的调度带宽的同一个跳频带宽上相邻的两个PRB。In a possible implementation manner, the PRB with the highest frequency in the first PRG and the PRB with the lowest frequency in the second PRG respectively correspond to different frequency hopping bandwidths of the SRS resource; PRGs are two adjacent PRGs in the frequency domain among the M PRGs, and the PRB with the highest frequency in the first PRG and the PRB with the lowest frequency in the second PRG are the same frequency hopping of the scheduling bandwidth of the PUSCH Two PRBs that are adjacent in bandwidth.
在一种可能的实现方式中,第三PRG和第四PRG对应所述SRS资源的同一个跳频带宽,且所述第三PRG和所述第四PRG对应所述第二信息指示的SRS资源的索引不同;其中,所述第三PRG和所述第四PRG为所述M个PRG中任意两个PRG。In a possible implementation manner, the third PRG and the fourth PRG correspond to the same frequency hopping bandwidth of the SRS resource, and the third PRG and the fourth PRG correspond to the SRS resource indicated by the second information The indexes of are different; wherein, the third PRG and the fourth PRG are any two PRGs in the M PRGs.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述第二信息包括SRI。In a possible implementation manner, the second information includes SRI.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述第二通信装置向所述第一通信装置发送所述PUSCH的传输层数L;其中,所述PUSCH的跳频带宽对应的PRG的数量满足H×P/L,所述H为所述第二指示信息指示的所述SRS资源的数量,所述P为所述PUSCH的跳频带宽对应的SRS资源的跳频带宽的数量,所述H、P和L均为正整数。In a possible implementation manner, the second communication apparatus sends the number of transmission layers L of the PUSCH to the first communication apparatus; wherein, the number of PRGs corresponding to the frequency hopping bandwidth of the PUSCH satisfies H×P /L, the H is the number of the SRS resources indicated by the second indication information, the P is the number of frequency hopping bandwidths of the SRS resources corresponding to the frequency hopping bandwidth of the PUSCH, the H, P and L is a positive integer.
第四方面的有益效果可参见上述第二方面的描述,此处不再赘述。For the beneficial effects of the fourth aspect, reference may be made to the description of the above-mentioned second aspect, which will not be repeated here.
第五方面,本申请提供一种通信装置,该通信装置具有实现上述第一方面中的第一通信装置功能,或者用于实现上述第二方面中的第一通信装置的功能,或者用于实现上述第三方面中的第二通信装置的功能,或者用于实现上述第四方面中的第二通信装置的功能。该功能可以通过硬件实现,也可以通过硬件执行相应的软件实现。该硬件或软件包括一个或多个与上述功能相对应的单元或模块。In a fifth aspect, the present application provides a communication device, the communication device having the function of realizing the first communication device in the first aspect above, or being used to realize the function of the first communication device in the second aspect, or being used to realize The function of the second communication device in the above third aspect, or for implementing the function of the second communication device in the above fourth aspect. This function can be implemented by hardware or by executing corresponding software by hardware. The hardware or software includes one or more units or modules corresponding to the above functions.
在一种可能的实现方式中,该通信装置可以是终端设备,或者是可用于终端设备中的模块,例如芯片或芯片系统或者电路。该通信装置可以包括:收发器和处理器。该处理器可被配置为支持该通信装置执行以上所示终端设备的相应功能,该收发器用于支持该通信装置与网络设备和其它终端设备等之间的通信。其中,收发器可以为独立的接收器、独立的发射器、集成收发功能的收发器、或者是接口电路。可选地,该通信装置还可以包括存储器,该存储器可以与处理器耦合,其保存该通信装置必要的程序指令和数据。In a possible implementation manner, the communication apparatus may be a terminal device, or a module usable in the terminal device, such as a chip or a chip system or a circuit. The communication apparatus may include a transceiver and a processor. The processor may be configured to support the communication apparatus to perform the corresponding functions of the terminal equipment shown above, and the transceiver is configured to support communication between the communication apparatus and network equipment, other terminal equipment, and the like. The transceiver may be an independent receiver, an independent transmitter, a transceiver with integrated transceiver functions, or an interface circuit. Optionally, the communication device may further include a memory, which may be coupled to the processor, and stores necessary program instructions and data for the communication device.
一种可能的应用中,有益效果可参见上述第一方面的描述,此处不再赘述。In a possible application, for the beneficial effects, reference may be made to the description of the above-mentioned first aspect, which will not be repeated here.
其中,收发器,用于接收来自第二通信装置的第一信息和第二信息,所述第一信息用于指示探测参考信号SRS资源的跳频带宽,所述第二信息用于指示所述SRS资源中部分或者全部SRS资源的索引;处理器,用于根据所述第一信息和所述第二信息,确定物理上行共享信道PUSCH的调度带宽对应的N个预编码资源块组PRG,所述N为正整数;收发器,还用于根据所述N个PRG发送所述PUSCH。The transceiver is configured to receive first information and second information from the second communication device, where the first information is used to indicate the frequency hopping bandwidth of the sounding reference signal SRS resource, and the second information is used to indicate the The index of some or all of the SRS resources in the SRS resources; the processor is configured to determine, according to the first information and the second information, N precoding resource block groups PRG corresponding to the scheduling bandwidth of the physical uplink shared channel PUSCH, where the The N is a positive integer; the transceiver is further configured to send the PUSCH according to the N PRGs.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述N个PRG中每个PRG对应所述SRS资源的一个跳频带宽。In a possible implementation manner, each PRG in the N PRGs corresponds to a frequency hopping bandwidth of the SRS resource.
在一种可能的实现方式中,第一PRG中频率最低的PRB与第二PRG中频率最高的PRB分别对应所述SRS资源的不同跳频带宽;其中,所述第一PRG和所述第二PRG为所述N个PRG中频域上相邻的两个PRG,所述第一PRG中频率最低的PRB与所述第二PRG中频率最高的PRB为所述PUSCH的调度带宽上相邻的两个PRB。In a possible implementation manner, the PRB with the lowest frequency in the first PRG and the PRB with the highest frequency in the second PRG respectively correspond to different frequency hopping bandwidths of the SRS resource; wherein, the first PRG and the second PRG PRGs are two adjacent PRGs in the frequency domain among the N PRGs, and the PRB with the lowest frequency in the first PRG and the PRB with the highest frequency in the second PRG are the two adjacent PRGs in the scheduling bandwidth of the PUSCH. PRBs.
在一种可能的实现方式中,第一PRG中频率最高的PRB与第二PRG中频率最低的PRB分别对应所述SRS资源的不同跳频带宽;其中,所述第一PRG和所述第二PRG为所述N个PRG中频域上相邻的两个PRG,所述第一PRG中频率最高的PRB与所述第二PRG中频率最低的PRB为所述PUSCH的调度带宽上相邻的两个PRB。In a possible implementation manner, the PRB with the highest frequency in the first PRG and the PRB with the lowest frequency in the second PRG respectively correspond to different frequency hopping bandwidths of the SRS resource; PRGs are two adjacent PRGs in the frequency domain in the N PRGs, and the PRB with the highest frequency in the first PRG and the PRB with the lowest frequency in the second PRG are the two adjacent PRGs in the scheduling bandwidth of the PUSCH PRBs.
在一种可能的实现方式中,第三PRG和第四PRG对应所述SRS资源的同一个跳频带宽,且所述第三PRG和所述第四PRG对应所述第二信息指示的SRS资源的索引不同;其中,所述第三PRG和所述第四PRG为所述N个PRG中任意两个PRG。In a possible implementation manner, the third PRG and the fourth PRG correspond to the same frequency hopping bandwidth of the SRS resource, and the third PRG and the fourth PRG correspond to the SRS resource indicated by the second information The indexes of are different; wherein, the third PRG and the fourth PRG are any two PRGs in the N PRGs.
在一种可能的实现方式中,处理器,还用于确定第五PRG对应的所述SRS资源的第一跳频带宽,在所述第五PRG上发送所述PUSCH的波束赋形方式为发送第一SRS的波束赋形方式,其中,所述第五PRG为所述N个PRG中的任一个;所述第一SRS承载于第一SRS资源的第一跳频带宽上,所述第一SRS资源的索引为所述第二信息指示的部分或全部SRS的资源索引。In a possible implementation manner, the processor is further configured to determine the first frequency hopping bandwidth of the SRS resource corresponding to the fifth PRG, and the beamforming manner for sending the PUSCH on the fifth PRG is to send the The beamforming mode of the first SRS, wherein the fifth PRG is any one of the N PRGs; the first SRS is carried on the first frequency hopping bandwidth of the first SRS resource, and the first The index of the SRS resource is the resource index of part or all of the SRS indicated by the second information.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述第一SRS的传输为与发送所述第二信息的时域间隔最小的一次SRS传输。In a possible implementation manner, the transmission of the first SRS is an SRS transmission with the smallest time domain interval from sending the second information.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述第二信息包括SRI。In a possible implementation manner, the second information includes SRI.
在一种可能的实现方式中,当所述PUSCH的传输层数等于L,所述N满足H×K/L,所述H为所述第二指示信息指示的所述SRS资源的数量,所述K为所述PUSCH的调度带宽对应的SRS资源的跳频带宽的数量,所述H、K和L均为正整数。In a possible implementation manner, when the number of transmission layers of the PUSCH is equal to L, the N satisfies H×K/L, the H is the number of the SRS resources indicated by the second indication information, and the The K is the number of frequency hopping bandwidths of the SRS resources corresponding to the scheduling bandwidth of the PUSCH, and the H, K and L are all positive integers.
另一种可能的应用中,有益效果可参见上述第二方面的描述,此处不再赘述。In another possible application, for the beneficial effects, reference may be made to the description of the above-mentioned second aspect, which will not be repeated here.
其中,收发器,用于接收来自第二通信装置的第三信息,所述第三信息用于指示物理上行共享信道PUSCH的跳频带宽和跳频次数;处理器,用于根据所述第三信息,确定所述PUSCH的调度带宽对应的M个预编码资源块组PRG,并根据所述M个PRG发送所述PUSCH,所述M为正整数。The transceiver is configured to receive third information from the second communication device, where the third information is used to indicate the frequency hopping bandwidth and frequency hopping times of the physical uplink shared channel PUSCH; the processor is configured to information, determine M precoding resource block groups PRGs corresponding to the scheduling bandwidth of the PUSCH, and send the PUSCH according to the M PRGs, where M is a positive integer.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述M个PRG中每个PRG对应所述PUSCH的一个跳频带宽。In a possible implementation manner, each PRG in the M PRGs corresponds to a frequency hopping bandwidth of the PUSCH.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述收发器,还用于接收来自所述第二通信装置的第一信息,所述第一信息用于指示探测参考信号SRS资源的跳频带宽;所述处理器,还用于根据所述第三信息和所述第一信息,确定所述PUSCH的调度带宽对应的M个PRG,其中,所述M个PRG中的每个PRG对应所述SRS资源的一个跳频带宽。In a possible implementation manner, the transceiver is further configured to receive first information from the second communication apparatus, where the first information is used to indicate a frequency hopping bandwidth of the sounding reference signal SRS resource; the The processor is further configured to determine, according to the third information and the first information, M PRGs corresponding to the scheduling bandwidth of the PUSCH, wherein each PRG in the M PRGs corresponds to the SRS resource A frequency hopping bandwidth.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述收发器,还用于接收来自所述第二通信装置的第一信息和第二信息,所述第一信息用于指示探测参考信号SRS资源的跳频带宽,所述第二信息用于指示所述SRS资源中部分或者全部SRS资源的索引;所述处理器,还用于根据所述第三信息、所述第一信息和所述第二信息,确定所述PUSCH的调度带宽对应的M个PRG,其中,所述M个PRG中的每个PRG对应所述SRS资源的一个跳频带宽。In a possible implementation manner, the transceiver is further configured to receive first information and second information from the second communication apparatus, where the first information is used to indicate frequency hopping of sounding reference signal SRS resources bandwidth, the second information is used to indicate indexes of some or all of the SRS resources in the SRS resources; the processor is further configured to, according to the third information, the first information and the second information, M PRGs corresponding to the scheduling bandwidth of the PUSCH are determined, wherein each PRG in the M PRGs corresponds to a frequency hopping bandwidth of the SRS resource.
在一种可能的实现方式中,第一PRG中频率最低的PRB与第二PRG中频率最高的PRB分别对应所述SRS资源的不同跳频带宽;其中,所述第一PRG和所述第二PRG为所述M个PRG中频域上相邻的两个PRG,所述第一PRG中频率最低的PRB与所述第二PRG中频率最高的PRB为所述PUSCH的调度带宽的同一个跳频带宽上相邻的两个PRB。In a possible implementation manner, the PRB with the lowest frequency in the first PRG and the PRB with the highest frequency in the second PRG respectively correspond to different frequency hopping bandwidths of the SRS resource; wherein, the first PRG and the second PRG PRGs are two adjacent PRGs in the frequency domain among the M PRGs, and the PRB with the lowest frequency in the first PRG and the PRB with the highest frequency in the second PRG are the same frequency hopping of the scheduling bandwidth of the PUSCH Two PRBs that are adjacent in bandwidth.
在一种可能的实现方式中,第一PRG中频率最高的PRB与第二PRG中频率最低的PRB分别对应所述SRS资源的不同跳频带宽;其中,所述第一PRG和所述第二PRG为所述M个PRG中频域上相邻的两个PRG,所述第一PRG中频率最高的PRB与所述第二PRG中频率最低的PRB为所述PUSCH的调度带宽的同一个跳频带宽上相邻的两个PRB。In a possible implementation manner, the PRB with the highest frequency in the first PRG and the PRB with the lowest frequency in the second PRG respectively correspond to different frequency hopping bandwidths of the SRS resource; PRGs are two adjacent PRGs in the frequency domain among the M PRGs, and the PRB with the highest frequency in the first PRG and the PRB with the lowest frequency in the second PRG are the same frequency hopping of the scheduling bandwidth of the PUSCH Two PRBs that are adjacent in bandwidth.
在一种可能的实现方式中,第三PRG和第四PRG对应所述SRS资源的同一个跳频带宽,且所述第三PRG和所述第四PRG对应所述第二信息指示的SRS资源的索引不同;其中,所述第三PRG和所述第四PRG为所述M个PRG中任意两个PRG。In a possible implementation manner, the third PRG and the fourth PRG correspond to the same frequency hopping bandwidth of the SRS resource, and the third PRG and the fourth PRG correspond to the SRS resource indicated by the second information The indexes of are different; wherein, the third PRG and the fourth PRG are any two PRGs in the M PRGs.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述方法处理器,还用于确定第五PRG对应的所述SRS资源的第一跳频带宽,在所述第五PRG上发送所述PUSCH的波束赋形方式为发送第一SRS的波束赋形方式,其中,所述第五PRG为所述M个PRG中的任一个;所述第一SRS承载于第一SRS资源的第一跳频带宽上,所述第一SRS的资源索引为所述第二信息指示的部分或全部SRS的资源索引。In a possible implementation manner, the method processor is further configured to determine the first frequency hopping bandwidth of the SRS resource corresponding to the fifth PRG, and send the beamforming of the PUSCH on the fifth PRG The method is a beamforming method for sending the first SRS, wherein the fifth PRG is any one of the M PRGs; the first SRS is carried on the first frequency hopping bandwidth of the first SRS resource, so The resource index of the first SRS is the resource index of part or all of the SRS indicated by the second information.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述第一SRS的传输为与发送所述第二信息的时域间隔最小的一次SRS传输。In a possible implementation manner, the transmission of the first SRS is an SRS transmission with the smallest time domain interval from sending the second information.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述第二信息包括SRI。In a possible implementation manner, the second information includes SRI.
在一种可能的实现方式中,当所述PUSCH的传输层数等于L,所述PUSCH的跳频带宽对应的PRG的数量满足H×P/L,所述H为所述第二指示信息指示的所述SRS资源的数量,所述P为所述PUSCH的跳频带宽对应的SRS资源的跳频带宽的数量,所述H、P和L均为正整数。In a possible implementation manner, when the number of transmission layers of the PUSCH is equal to L, the number of PRGs corresponding to the frequency hopping bandwidth of the PUSCH satisfies H×P/L, and the H is the indication of the second indication information The number of the SRS resources, the P is the number of frequency hopping bandwidths of the SRS resources corresponding to the frequency hopping bandwidth of the PUSCH, and the H, P and L are all positive integers.
在另一种可能的实现方式中,该通信装置可以是网络设备,或者是可用于网络设备的部件,例如芯片或芯片系统或者电路。该通信装置可以包括:收发器和处理器。该处理器可被配置为支持该通信装置执行以上所示网络设备的相应功能,该收发器用于支持该通信装置与其它网络设备和终端设备等之间的通信。其中,收发器可以为独立的接收器、独立的发射器、集成收发功能的收发器、或者是接口电路。可选地,该通信装置还可以包括存储器,该存储器可以与处理器耦合,其保存该通信装置必要的程序指令和数据。In another possible implementation manner, the communication apparatus may be a network device, or a component usable in a network device, such as a chip or a system of chips or a circuit. The communication apparatus may include a transceiver and a processor. The processor may be configured to support the communication apparatus to perform the corresponding functions of the network equipment shown above, and the transceiver is configured to support communication between the communication apparatus and other network equipment, terminal equipment, and the like. The transceiver may be an independent receiver, an independent transmitter, a transceiver with integrated transceiver functions, or an interface circuit. Optionally, the communication device may further include a memory, which may be coupled to the processor, and stores necessary program instructions and data for the communication device.
一种可能的应用中,有益效果可参见上述第三方面的描述,此处不再赘述。In a possible application, for the beneficial effects, reference may be made to the description of the above-mentioned third aspect, which will not be repeated here.
其中,处理器,用于确定第一信息和第二信息,所述第一信息用于指示探测参考信号SRS资源的跳频带宽,所述第二信息用于指示所述SRS资源中部分或者全部SRS资源的索引;收发器,用于向第一通信装置发送所述第一信息和所述第二信息,所述第一信息和所述第二信息用于确定PUSCH的调度带宽对应的N个PRG,所述N为正整数。The processor is configured to determine first information and second information, where the first information is used to indicate the frequency hopping bandwidth of the sounding reference signal SRS resources, and the second information is used to indicate part or all of the SRS resources An index of the SRS resource; a transceiver, configured to send the first information and the second information to the first communication apparatus, where the first information and the second information are used to determine N corresponding to the scheduling bandwidth of the PUSCH PRG, the N is a positive integer.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述N个PRG中每个PRG对应所述SRS资源的一个跳频带宽。In a possible implementation manner, each PRG in the N PRGs corresponds to a frequency hopping bandwidth of the SRS resource.
在一种可能的实现方式中,第一PRG中频率最低的PRB与第二PRG中频率最高的PRB分别对应所述SRS资源的不同跳频带宽;其中,所述第一PRG和所述第二PRG为所述N个PRG中频域上相邻的两个PRG,所述第一PRG中频率最低的PRB与所述第二PRG中频率最高的PRB为所述PUSCH的调度带宽上相邻的两个PRB。In a possible implementation manner, the PRB with the lowest frequency in the first PRG and the PRB with the highest frequency in the second PRG respectively correspond to different frequency hopping bandwidths of the SRS resource; wherein, the first PRG and the second PRG PRGs are two adjacent PRGs in the frequency domain among the N PRGs, and the PRB with the lowest frequency in the first PRG and the PRB with the highest frequency in the second PRG are the two adjacent PRGs in the scheduling bandwidth of the PUSCH. PRBs.
在一种可能的实现方式中,第一PRG中频率最高的PRB与第二PRG中频率最低的PRB分别对应所述SRS资源的不同跳频带宽;其中,所述第一PRG和所述第二PRG为所述N个PRG中频域上相邻的两个PRG,所述第一PRG中频率最高的PRB与所述第二PRG中频率最低的PRB为所述PUSCH的调度带宽上相邻的两个PRB。In a possible implementation manner, the PRB with the highest frequency in the first PRG and the PRB with the lowest frequency in the second PRG respectively correspond to different frequency hopping bandwidths of the SRS resource; PRGs are two adjacent PRGs in the frequency domain in the N PRGs, and the PRB with the highest frequency in the first PRG and the PRB with the lowest frequency in the second PRG are the two adjacent PRGs in the scheduling bandwidth of the PUSCH PRBs.
在一种可能的实现方式中,第三PRG和第四PRG对应所述SRS资源的同一个跳频带宽,且所述第三PRG和所述第四PRG对应所述第二信息指示的SRS资源的索引不同;其中,所述第三PRG和所述第四PRG为所述N个PRG中任意两个PRG。In a possible implementation manner, the third PRG and the fourth PRG correspond to the same frequency hopping bandwidth of the SRS resource, and the third PRG and the fourth PRG correspond to the SRS resource indicated by the second information The indexes of are different; wherein, the third PRG and the fourth PRG are any two PRGs in the N PRGs.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述第二信息包括SRI。In a possible implementation manner, the second information includes SRI.
在一种可能的实现方式中,收发器还用于向所述第一通信装置指示所述PUSCH的传输层数L;其中,所述N满足H×K/L,所述H为所述第二指示信息指示的所述SRS资源的数量,所述K为所述PUSCH的调度带宽对应的SRS资源的跳频带宽的数量,所述H、K和L均为正整数。In a possible implementation manner, the transceiver is further configured to indicate the number of transmission layers L of the PUSCH to the first communication apparatus; wherein, the N satisfies H×K/L, and the H is the first 2. The number of the SRS resources indicated by the indication information, the K is the number of frequency hopping bandwidths of the SRS resources corresponding to the scheduling bandwidth of the PUSCH, and the H, K and L are all positive integers.
另一种应用中,有益效果可参见上述第四方面的描述,此处不再赘述。In another application, for the beneficial effects, reference may be made to the description of the above-mentioned fourth aspect, which will not be repeated here.
其中,处理器,用于确定第三信息,所述第三信息用于指示物理上行共享信道PUSCH的跳频带宽和跳频次数;收发器,用于向第一通信装置发送所述第三信息,所述第三信息用于所述第一通信装置确定物理上行共享信道PUSCH的调度带宽对应的M个预编码资源块组PRG,所述M为正整数。The processor is configured to determine third information, where the third information is used to indicate the frequency hopping bandwidth and frequency hopping times of the physical uplink shared channel PUSCH; the transceiver is configured to send the third information to the first communication device , the third information is used by the first communication apparatus to determine M precoding resource block groups PRG corresponding to the scheduling bandwidth of the physical uplink shared channel PUSCH, where M is a positive integer.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述M个PRG中每个PRG对应所述PUSCH的一个跳频带宽。In a possible implementation manner, each PRG in the M PRGs corresponds to a frequency hopping bandwidth of the PUSCH.
在一种可能的实现方式中,处理器,还用于确定第一信息,所述第一信息用于指示探测参考信号SRS资源的跳频带宽;收发器,还用于向所述第一通信装置发送所述第一信息,所述第一信息和所述第三信息用于所述第一通信装置确定所述PUSCH的调度带宽对应的M个PRG,其中,所述M个PRG中的每个PRG对应所述SRS资源的一个跳频带宽。In a possible implementation manner, the processor is further configured to determine first information, where the first information is used to indicate a frequency hopping bandwidth of the sounding reference signal SRS resource; the transceiver is further configured to communicate with the first The device sends the first information, and the first information and the third information are used by the first communication device to determine M PRGs corresponding to the scheduling bandwidth of the PUSCH, wherein each of the M PRGs Each PRG corresponds to one frequency hopping bandwidth of the SRS resource.
在一种可能的实现方式中,处理器,还用于确定第一信息和第二信息,所述第一信息用于指示探测参考信号SRS资源的跳频带宽,所述第二信息用于指示所述SRS资源中部分或者全部SRS资源的索引;In a possible implementation manner, the processor is further configured to determine first information and second information, where the first information is used to indicate a frequency hopping bandwidth of the sounding reference signal SRS resource, and the second information is used to indicate an index of some or all of the SRS resources in the SRS resources;
在一种可能的实现方式中,收发器,还用于向所述第一通信装置发送所述第一信息和所述第二信息,所述第一信息、所述第二信息和所述第三信息用于所述第一通信装置确定所述PUSCH的调度带宽对应的M个PRG,其中,所述M个PRG中的每个PRG对应所述SRS资源的一个跳频带宽。In a possible implementation manner, the transceiver is further configured to send the first information and the second information to the first communication apparatus, the first information, the second information and the first information The third information is used by the first communication apparatus to determine M PRGs corresponding to the scheduling bandwidth of the PUSCH, wherein each PRG in the M PRGs corresponds to a frequency hopping bandwidth of the SRS resource.
在一种可能的实现方式中,第一PRG中频率最低的PRB与第二PRG中频率最高的PRB分别对应所述SRS资源的不同跳频带宽;其中,所述第一PRG和所述第二PRG为所述M个PRG中频域上相邻的两个PRG,所述第一PRG中频率最低的PRB与所述第二PRG中频率最高的PRB为所述PUSCH的调度带宽的同一个跳频带宽上相邻的两个PRB。In a possible implementation manner, the PRB with the lowest frequency in the first PRG and the PRB with the highest frequency in the second PRG respectively correspond to different frequency hopping bandwidths of the SRS resource; wherein, the first PRG and the second PRG PRGs are two adjacent PRGs in the frequency domain among the M PRGs, and the PRB with the lowest frequency in the first PRG and the PRB with the highest frequency in the second PRG are the same frequency hopping of the scheduling bandwidth of the PUSCH Two PRBs that are adjacent in bandwidth.
在一种可能的实现方式中,第一PRG中频率最高的PRB与第二PRG中频率最低的PRB分别对应所述SRS资源的不同跳频带宽;其中,所述第一PRG和所述第二PRG为所述M个PRG中频域上相邻的两个PRG,所述第一PRG中频率最高的PRB与所述第二PRG中频率最低的PRB为所述PUSCH的调度带宽的同一个跳频带宽上相邻的两个PRB。In a possible implementation manner, the PRB with the highest frequency in the first PRG and the PRB with the lowest frequency in the second PRG respectively correspond to different frequency hopping bandwidths of the SRS resource; PRGs are two adjacent PRGs in the frequency domain among the M PRGs, and the PRB with the highest frequency in the first PRG and the PRB with the lowest frequency in the second PRG are the same frequency hopping of the scheduling bandwidth of the PUSCH Two PRBs that are adjacent in bandwidth.
在一种可能的实现方式中,第三PRG和第四PRG对应所述SRS资源的同一个跳频带宽,且所述第三PRG和所述第四PRG对应所述第二信息指示的SRS资源的索引不同;其 中,所述第三PRG和所述第四PRG为所述M个PRG中任意两个PRG。In a possible implementation manner, the third PRG and the fourth PRG correspond to the same frequency hopping bandwidth of the SRS resource, and the third PRG and the fourth PRG correspond to the SRS resource indicated by the second information The indexes of are different; wherein, the third PRG and the fourth PRG are any two PRGs in the M PRGs.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述第二信息包括SRI。In a possible implementation manner, the second information includes SRI.
在一种可能的实现方式中,收发器,还用于向所述第一通信装置指示所述PUSCH的传输层数L;其中,所述PUSCH的跳频带宽对应的PRG的数量满足H×P/L,所述H为所述第二指示信息指示的所述SRS资源的数量,所述P为所述PUSCH的跳频带宽对应的SRS资源的跳频带宽的数量,所述H、P和L均为正整数。In a possible implementation manner, the transceiver is further configured to indicate the number of transmission layers L of the PUSCH to the first communication device; wherein, the number of PRGs corresponding to the frequency hopping bandwidth of the PUSCH satisfies H×P /L, the H is the number of the SRS resources indicated by the second indication information, the P is the number of frequency hopping bandwidths of the SRS resources corresponding to the frequency hopping bandwidth of the PUSCH, the H, P and L is a positive integer.
第六方面,本申请提供一种通信装置,该通信装置用于实现上述第一方面或第一方面中的任意一种方法,或者用于实现上述第二方面或第二方面中的任意一种方法,或者用于实现上述第三方面或第三方面中的任意一种方法,或者用于实现上述第四方面或第四方面中的任意一种方法,包括相应的功能模块,分别用于实现以上方法中的步骤。功能可以通过硬件实现,也可以通过硬件执行相应的软件实现。硬件或软件包括一个或多个与上述功能相对应的模块。In a sixth aspect, the present application provides a communication device for implementing the first aspect or any method in the first aspect, or for implementing any one in the second aspect or the second aspect. The method, or used to implement any one of the third aspect or the third aspect, or used to implement any one of the fourth aspect or the fourth aspect, including corresponding functional modules, respectively used to implement steps in the above method. The functions can be implemented by hardware, or by executing corresponding software by hardware. The hardware or software includes one or more modules corresponding to the above functions.
在一种可能的实施方式中,该通信装置可为终端设备,该通信装置可以括处理模块和收发模块,这些模块可以执行上述方法示例中终端设备的相应功能,具体参见方法示例中的详细描述,此处不做赘述。In a possible implementation manner, the communication device may be a terminal device, and the communication device may include a processing module and a transceiver module, and these modules may perform the corresponding functions of the terminal device in the above method example. For details, please refer to the detailed description in the method example. , will not be repeated here.
在另一种可能的实施方式中,该通信装置还可以是网络设备,该通信装置可以包括收发模块和处理模块,这些模块可以执行上述方法示例中网络设备的相应功能,具体参见方法示例中的详细描述,此处不做赘述。In another possible implementation manner, the communication apparatus may also be a network device, and the communication apparatus may include a transceiver module and a processing module, and these modules may perform the corresponding functions of the network device in the above method examples. For details, please refer to the method examples. The detailed description will not be repeated here.
第七方面,本申请提供一种通信系统,该通信系统包括终端设备和网络设备。其中,终端设备可以用于执行上述第一方面或第一方面中的任意一种方法,网络设备可以用于执行上述第三方面或第三方面中的任意一种方法;或者,终端设备可以用于执行上述第二方面或第二方面中任意一种方法,网络设备可用于执行上述第四方面或第四方面中任意一种方法。In a seventh aspect, the present application provides a communication system, where the communication system includes a terminal device and a network device. Wherein, the terminal device can be used to execute any method in the first aspect or the first aspect, and the network device can be used to execute any method in the third aspect or the third aspect; or, the terminal device can use In order to perform the above second aspect or any one of the methods in the second aspect, the network device may be used to perform any one of the above fourth aspect or the method in the fourth aspect.
第八方面,本申请提供一种计算机可读存储介质,计算机可读存储介质中存储有计算机程序或指令,当计算机程序或指令被通信装置执行时,使得该通信装置执行上述第一方面或第一方面的任意可能的实现方式中的方法、或者使得该通信装置执行上述第二方面或第二方面的任意可能的实现方式中的方法、或者使得该通信装置执行第三方面或第三方面的任意可能的实现方式中的方法、或者使得该通信装置执行第四方面或第四方面的任意可能的实现方式中的方法。In an eighth aspect, the present application provides a computer-readable storage medium, in which a computer program or instruction is stored, and when the computer program or instruction is executed by a communication device, the communication device is made to perform the above-mentioned first aspect or the first aspect. The method in any possible implementation of the one aspect, or the communication device is caused to perform the method in the second aspect or any possible implementation of the second aspect, or the communication device is caused to perform the third aspect or the third aspect. The method in any possible implementation, or causing the communication apparatus to perform the fourth aspect or the method in any possible implementation of the fourth aspect.
第九方面,本申请提供一种计算机程序产品,该计算机程序产品包括计算机程序或指令,当该计算机程序或指令被通信装置执行时,使得该通信装置执行上述第一方面或第一方面的任意可能的实现方式中的方法、或者使得该通信装置执行上述第二方面或第二方面的任意可能的实现方式中的方法、或者使得该通信装置执行上述第三方面或第三方面的任意可能的实现方式中的方法、或者使得该通信装置执行上述第四方面或第四方面的任意可能的实现方式中的方法。In a ninth aspect, the present application provides a computer program product, the computer program product includes a computer program or an instruction, when the computer program or instruction is executed by a communication device, the communication device is made to perform the above-mentioned first aspect or any of the first aspects. The method in a possible implementation, or the communication device is caused to perform the method in the second aspect or any possible implementation of the second aspect, or the communication device is caused to perform the third aspect or any possible implementation of the third aspect. The method in the implementation manner, or the communication apparatus is caused to perform the method in the fourth aspect or any possible implementation manner of the fourth aspect.
附图说明Description of drawings
图1为现有技术中的一种指示PUSCH的PRG的方式示意图;1 is a schematic diagram of a manner of indicating a PRG of a PUSCH in the prior art;
图2为本申请提供的一种SRS资源为跳频模式示意图;FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram of a frequency hopping mode provided by a kind of SRS resource for this application;
图3为本申请提供的一种通信系统的架构示意图;3 is a schematic diagram of the architecture of a communication system provided by the present application;
图4为本申请提供的一种multi-TRP场景的示意图;4 is a schematic diagram of a multi-TRP scenario provided by the present application;
图5为本申请提供的一种PRG包括的PRB的数量与对应的DCI传输性能的关系示意图;5 is a schematic diagram of the relationship between the number of PRBs included in a PRG provided by the application and the corresponding DCI transmission performance;
图6为本申请提供的一种通信方法的方法流程示意图;6 is a schematic flowchart of a method of a communication method provided by the present application;
图7a为本申请提供的一种PUSCH的调度带宽与SRS资源的跳频带宽的关系示意图;7a is a schematic diagram of the relationship between a scheduling bandwidth of a PUSCH and a frequency hopping bandwidth of an SRS resource provided by the present application;
图7b为本申请提供的另一种PUSCH的调度带宽与SRS资源的跳频带宽的关系示意图;7b is a schematic diagram of the relationship between the scheduling bandwidth of another PUSCH and the frequency hopping bandwidth of the SRS resource provided by the application;
图8为本申请提供的一种SRS资源的跳频带宽与实际跳频带宽的关系示意图;8 is a schematic diagram of the relationship between the frequency hopping bandwidth and the actual frequency hopping bandwidth of a kind of SRS resource provided by the present application;
图9为本申请提供的又一种PUSCH的调度带宽与SRS资源的跳频带宽的关系示意图;9 is a schematic diagram of the relationship between the scheduling bandwidth of another PUSCH and the frequency hopping bandwidth of the SRS resource provided by the present application;
图10为本申请提供的另一种通信方法的方法流程示意图;10 is a schematic flowchart of another communication method provided by the application;
图11为本申请提供的一种通信装置的结构示意图;11 is a schematic structural diagram of a communication device provided by the application;
图12为本申请提供的一种通信装置的结构示意图;12 is a schematic structural diagram of a communication device provided by the application;
图13为本申请提供的一种终端设备的结构示意图;13 is a schematic structural diagram of a terminal device provided by the application;
图14为本申请提供的一种网络设备的结构示意图。FIG. 14 is a schematic structural diagram of a network device provided by this application.
具体实施方式detailed description
下面将结合附图,对本申请实施例进行详细描述。The embodiments of the present application will be described in detail below with reference to the accompanying drawings.
以下,对本申请中的部分用语进行解释说明。需要说明的是,这些解释是为了便于本领域技术人员理解,并不是对本申请所要求的保护范围构成限定。Hereinafter, some terms used in this application will be explained. It should be noted that these explanations are for the convenience of those skilled in the art to understand, and do not limit the scope of protection required by the present application.
1)相干联合接收(coherent joint reception)1) Coherent joint reception
相干联合接收指上行多点协作传输(coordinated multi-point transmission,CoMP)中的一个技术。为了提升上行信号接收的可靠性,网络设备侧会同时存在具备一定空间隔离度的多个接收节点接收同一个上行信号。其中,多个接收节点可将接收到的信号进行相干合并提升天线增益。例如,可以将多个接收节点可以将接收到的信号做快速傅里叶变换(fast fourier transformation,FFT)变换后,拼接成更高维度的信号矩阵,对该信号矩阵做最小均方误差(minimum mean square error,MMSE)、或者最大比合并(maximum ratio combination,MRC)处理,等效提升了接收信号的信噪比。Coherent joint reception refers to a technique in uplink coordinated multi-point transmission (CoMP). In order to improve the reliability of uplink signal reception, multiple receiving nodes with a certain degree of spatial isolation will simultaneously exist on the network device side to receive the same uplink signal. Among them, multiple receiving nodes can coherently combine the received signals to improve the antenna gain. For example, multiple receiving nodes can perform fast Fourier transform (fast Fourier transformation, FFT) transformation on the received signals, splicing them into a higher-dimensional signal matrix, and perform a minimum mean square error (minimum square error) on the signal matrix. mean square error, MMSE), or maximum ratio combining (maximum ratio combining, MRC) processing, which equivalently improves the signal-to-noise ratio of the received signal.
2)波束赋形(beamforming)2) Beamforming (beamforming)
发送端做波束赋形操作是指,利用发送端的多天线并发能力,通过在每个发送天线上叠加不同的相位,在传输空间中形成具备指向性的发送信号,以提升信号发送质量。波束赋形的一种操作方式是,使用预编码矩阵W将传输层(layer)或者调制符号映射到各个发送天线或者发送天线端口。例如,波束赋形操作为:
Figure PCTCN2021112454-appb-000001
其中,W为预编码矩阵,[y (0)(i)...y (υ-1)(i)] T为各个传输层上的调制符号,{p 0...p ρ-1}对应发送天线端口,z为各个发送天线端口上发送的调制符号。预编码矩阵的维度可以是P*R,其中,R为传输层数,传输层数指传输块(transport block,TB)或者码字(code word)在空间上形成的正交信号的流数;P为天线端口的个数。波束赋形的另一种操作方式是,通过调整 每个发送天线端口上的模拟移相器,形成指向性波束,从而提升信号传输质量。
The beamforming operation at the transmitting end refers to the use of the multi-antenna concurrent capability of the transmitting end to form a directional transmit signal in the transmission space by superimposing different phases on each transmit antenna to improve the signal transmission quality. One way of operating beamforming is to use a precoding matrix W to map transmission layers or modulation symbols to individual transmit antennas or transmit antenna ports. For example, the beamforming operation is:
Figure PCTCN2021112454-appb-000001
where W is the precoding matrix, [y (0) (i)...y (υ-1) (i)] T is the modulation symbol on each transmission layer, {p 0 ...p ρ-1 } Corresponding to the transmit antenna port, z is the modulation symbol sent on each transmit antenna port. The dimension of the precoding matrix may be P*R, where R is the number of transmission layers, and the number of transmission layers refers to the number of streams of orthogonal signals formed by a transport block (transport block, TB) or a code word (code word) in space; P is the number of antenna ports. Another way of operating beamforming is by adjusting the analog phase shifter on each transmit antenna port to form a directional beam, thereby improving the quality of the signal transmission.
3)预编码资源块组(precoding resource group,PRG)3) Precoding resource block group (precoding resource group, PRG)
PRG是指一组采用相同波束赋形方式(如预编码矩阵)的物理资源块PRB。本申请中的PRG是一个频域概念,即,每个PRG中包括至少一个PRB。PRG是基于PUSCH的调度带宽定义的,每个PRG包括PUSCH调度带宽中的部分PRB。其中,PUSCH的调度带宽指:网络设备通过信令指示的PUSCH所占的带宽。通常,一个PRG中的PRB是连续的,所谓PRB是连续的是指PRB的编号是连续的。例如,PUSCH的调度带宽包括PRB 0、PRB 1、PRB 2……,PRB 0和PRB 1即为编号连续的两个PRB,PRB 1和PRB 2即为编号连续的两个PRB。再比如,PUSCH的调度带宽包括PRB 0、PRB 2、PRB 5……,则PRB 0和PRB 2即为编号连续的两个PRB,PRB 2和PRB 5也是编号连续的两个PRB。其中,物理资源模块(physical resource block,PRB)包括12个连续的子载波。通过定义PRG,可以支持PUSCH采用频率选择性的波束赋形方式发送,且同一个PRG内的PRB可以做联合信道估计,可兼顾信道估计的性能。 A PRG refers to a group of PRBs using the same beamforming method (eg, a precoding matrix). The PRG in this application is a frequency domain concept, that is, each PRG includes at least one PRB. The PRGs are defined based on the scheduling bandwidth of the PUSCH, and each PRG includes a part of the PRBs in the scheduling bandwidth of the PUSCH. The scheduling bandwidth of the PUSCH refers to the bandwidth occupied by the PUSCH indicated by the network device through signaling. Usually, the PRBs in a PRG are consecutive. The so-called PRBs being consecutive means that the numbers of the PRBs are consecutive. For example, the scheduling bandwidth of the PUSCH includes PRB 0 , PRB 1 , PRB 2 . . . PRB 0 and PRB 1 are two consecutive PRBs, and PRB 1 and PRB 2 are two consecutive PRBs. For another example, the scheduling bandwidth of PUSCH includes PRB 0 , PRB 2 , PRB 5 . . ., then PRB 0 and PRB 2 are two consecutive PRBs, and PRB 2 and PRB 5 are also two consecutive PRBs. The physical resource block (physical resource block, PRB) includes 12 consecutive subcarriers. By defining PRGs, the PUSCH can be sent in a frequency-selective beamforming manner, and the PRBs in the same PRG can be used for joint channel estimation, which can take into account the performance of channel estimation.
4)SRS资源的跳频(frequency hopping)模式4) Frequency hopping mode of SRS resources
终端设备会在SRS资源上发送SRS。一个SRS资源的配置中包括该资源占用的时频资源。其中,SRS资源可以配置跳频模式,通常是指一个SRS资源在一个正交频分复用(orthogonal frequency division multiplexing,OFDM)符号内没有占满整个系统带宽,即是通过多个OFDM符号占满了整个系统带宽,其中,系统带宽是指终端设备可以与网络设备进行通信的带宽,系统带宽可以理解为一个载波(component carrier),或者一个部分带宽(bandwidth part,BWP)。也可以理解为,一个OFDM符号可探测(sounding)部分系统带宽,需要多个OFDM符号,甚至多个时隙(slot)(时隙由多个OFDM符号组成)才能探测整个系统带宽。即,针对同一个SRS资源,不同OFDM符号上SRS资源占用的带宽不同。The terminal device will send the SRS on the SRS resource. The configuration of an SRS resource includes time-frequency resources occupied by the resource. The SRS resource can be configured with a frequency hopping mode, which usually means that one SRS resource does not occupy the entire system bandwidth within one orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (OFDM) symbol, that is, it is filled by multiple OFDM symbols. The system bandwidth refers to the bandwidth that the terminal device can communicate with the network device, and the system bandwidth can be understood as a carrier (component carrier), or a bandwidth part (BWP). It can also be understood that one OFDM symbol can sound a part of the system bandwidth, and multiple OFDM symbols, or even multiple slots (slots composed of multiple OFDM symbols) are required to sound the entire system bandwidth. That is, for the same SRS resource, the bandwidth occupied by the SRS resource on different OFDM symbols is different.
如图2所示,为本申请提供的一种SRS资源为跳频模式的示意图。配置的4个SRS资源(SRS资源0、SRS资源1、SRS资源2和SRS资源3)在同一个符号上占用相同的带宽,每个SRS资源在时域上占用4个符号,在不同的符号上占用不同的带宽。对于每个SRS资源上的SRS而言,一个OFDM符号可探测1/4的系统带宽,需要4个OFDM符号才能探测整个系统带宽。相应地,网络设备可在4个符号上分别接收SRS,从而根据4个符号上接收到的SRS获取完整的上行信道。As shown in FIG. 2 , a schematic diagram of a SRS resource provided by the present application is a frequency hopping mode. The configured 4 SRS resources (SRS resource 0, SRS resource 1, SRS resource 2, and SRS resource 3) occupy the same bandwidth on the same symbol, and each SRS resource occupies 4 symbols in the time domain. occupy different bandwidth. For the SRS on each SRS resource, one OFDM symbol can detect 1/4 of the system bandwidth, and 4 OFDM symbols are required to detect the entire system bandwidth. Correspondingly, the network device can receive the SRS on the 4 symbols respectively, so as to obtain a complete uplink channel according to the SRS received on the 4 symbols.
需要说明的是,本申请中,SRS资源与PUSCH的调度带宽位于同一个载波(component carrier,CC),或者位于同一个部分带宽内(bandwidth part,BWP)内。也可以理解为,SRS资源与PUSCH的调度带宽位于相同的系统带宽内。It should be noted that, in this application, the SRS resource and the scheduling bandwidth of the PUSCH are located in the same carrier (component carrier, CC), or in the same partial bandwidth (bandwidth part, BWP). It can also be understood that the SRS resource and the scheduling bandwidth of the PUSCH are located within the same system bandwidth.
5)基于非码本的上行传输机制5) Uplink transmission mechanism based on non-codebook
在现有的非码本的上行传输机制中,终端设备会在多个SRS资源上分别采用不同的波束赋形方式发送SRS。网络设备在调度PUSCH时会指示至少一个SRS资源或者SRS端口(一个SRS资源可包括一个SRS端口),终端设备根据指示的SRS资源确定PUSCH的传输层采用的波束赋形方式。SRS资源或者SRS端口与PUSCH传输层之间存在对应关系,例如,一个SRS资源对应一个PUSCH传输层;再比如,多个SRS资源对应一个PUSCH传输层。In the existing non-codebook uplink transmission mechanism, the terminal device transmits the SRS in different beamforming manners on multiple SRS resources respectively. The network device will indicate at least one SRS resource or SRS port (one SRS resource may include one SRS port) when scheduling the PUSCH, and the terminal device determines the beamforming mode adopted by the transmission layer of the PUSCH according to the indicated SRS resource. There is a correspondence between SRS resources or SRS ports and a PUSCH transmission layer. For example, one SRS resource corresponds to one PUSCH transmission layer; for another example, multiple SRS resources correspond to one PUSCH transmission layer.
前文介绍了本申请所涉及到的一些用语,下面介绍本申请可应用的一种通信系统架构。图3是本申请的可应用的一种通信系统的架构示意图。如图3所示,该通信系统可包括网络设备101和终端设备102。终端设备可通过无线的方式与网络设备相互通信。终端设备可以是固定位置的,也可以是可移动的。图3仅是示意图,该通信系统中还可以包括其它网络设备,如还可以包括无线中继设备和无线回传设备,在图3中未画出。本申请对该通信系统中包括的网络设备和终端设备的数量不做限定。Some terms involved in this application are introduced above, and a communication system architecture applicable to this application is introduced below. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram of the architecture of a communication system to which the present application can be applied. As shown in FIG. 3 , the communication system may include a network device 101 and a terminal device 102 . Terminal devices can communicate with network devices wirelessly. Terminal equipment can be fixed or movable. FIG. 3 is only a schematic diagram, the communication system may also include other network devices, such as wireless relay devices and wireless backhaul devices, which are not shown in FIG. 3 . This application does not limit the number of network devices and terminal devices included in the communication system.
网络设备是终端设备通过无线方式接入到该通信系统中的接入设备,可为终端设备提供无线通信功能。可以是基站(base station)、演进型基站(evolved NodeB,eNodeB)、传输(发送接收)点(transmission reception point,TRP)、5G通信系统中的下一代基站(next generation NodeB,gNB)、未来通信系统中的基站或无线保真(wireless-fidelity,WiFi)系统中的接入节点等;也可以是完成基站部分功能的模块或单元,例如,可以是集中式单元(central unit,CU),也可以是分布式单元(distributed unit,DU)。本申请的实施例对网络设备所采用的具体技术和具体设备形态不做限定。A network device is an access device that a terminal device wirelessly accesses to the communication system, and can provide a wireless communication function for the terminal device. It can be a base station (base station), an evolved base station (evolved NodeB, eNodeB), a transmission (transmission and reception) point (transmission reception point, TRP), the next generation base station (next generation NodeB, gNB) in the 5G communication system, future communication A base station in the system or an access node in a wireless-fidelity (WiFi) system, etc.; it can also be a module or unit that completes some functions of the base station, for example, it can be a centralized unit (central unit, CU), or It can be a distributed unit (DU). The embodiments of the present application do not limit the specific technology and specific device form adopted by the network device.
终端设备也可以称为终端、用户设备(user equipment,UE)、移动台、移动终端等。终端设备可以是手机、平板电脑、带无线收发功能的电脑、虚拟现实终端设备、增强现实终端设备、工业控制中的无线终端、无人驾驶中的无线终端、远程手术中的无线终端、智能电网中的无线终端、运输安全中的无线终端、智慧城市中的无线终端、智慧家庭中的无线终端等等。本申请对终端设备所采用的具体技术和具体设备形态不做限定。A terminal device may also be referred to as a terminal, user equipment (UE), a mobile station, a mobile terminal, and the like. The terminal equipment can be mobile phone, tablet computer, computer with wireless transceiver function, virtual reality terminal equipment, augmented reality terminal equipment, wireless terminal in industrial control, wireless terminal in unmanned driving, wireless terminal in remote surgery, smart grid wireless terminals in transportation security, wireless terminals in smart cities, wireless terminals in smart homes, etc. This application does not limit the specific technology and specific device form adopted by the terminal device.
网络设备和终端设备可以部署在陆地上,包括室内或室外、手持或车载;也可以部署在水面上;还可以部署在空中的飞机、气球和人造卫星上。本申请对网络设备和终端设备的应用场景不做限定。Network equipment and terminal equipment can be deployed on land, including indoor or outdoor, handheld or vehicle; can also be deployed on water; can also be deployed in the air on aircraft, balloons and satellites. This application does not limit the application scenarios of network devices and terminal devices.
网络设备和终端设备之间可以通过授权频谱进行通信,也可以通过免授权频谱进行通信,也可以同时通过授权频谱和免授权频谱进行通信。网络设备和终端设备之间可以通过6千兆赫(gigahertz,GHz)以下的频谱进行通信,也可以通过6GHz以上的频谱进行通信,还可以同时使用6GHz以下的频谱和6GHz以上的频谱进行通信。本申请对网络设备和终端设备之间所使用的频谱资源不做限定。The network device and the terminal device can communicate through the licensed spectrum, the unlicensed spectrum, or the licensed spectrum and the unlicensed spectrum at the same time. The network device and the terminal device can communicate through the frequency spectrum below 6 GHz (gigahertz, GHz), and can also communicate through the frequency spectrum above 6 GHz, and can also use the frequency spectrum below 6 GHz and the frequency spectrum above 6 GHz for communication at the same time. This application does not limit the spectrum resources used between the network device and the terminal device.
本申请中的通信系统可以是第四代(4th generation,4G)移动通信系统,或者是第五代(5th generation,5G)移动通信系统、还可以是其他通信系统,例如公共陆地移动网络(public land mobile network,PLMN)系统,或未来可能出现的其他移动通信系统等,本申请不做限定。The communication system in this application may be a fourth generation (4th generation, 4G) mobile communication system, or a fifth generation (5th generation, 5G) mobile communication system, or may be other communication systems, such as a public land mobile network (public land mobile network). land mobile network, PLMN) system, or other mobile communication systems that may appear in the future, etc., are not limited in this application.
本申请适用于具有single-TRP或multi-TRP的场景,以及它们任何一种衍生的场景。参阅图4,为本申请提供的一种multi-TRP场景。多个TRP302可以连接同一个基带单元(baseband unit,BBU)301,也可以连接不同的BBU301,本申请对此不做限定,图4中的BBU以基站为例、TRP以终端设备为例进行示例。multi-TRP场景在4G中的一种实现形式是单频网小区(single frequency network cell,SFN cell),在5G中的一种实现形式是超级小区(hyper cell)。需要说明的是,本申请中PUSCH采用频率选择预编码时,通过仿真发现:在多个-传输接收节点(multi-transmission reception point,multi-TRP)场景下获得的增益要高于单个-传输接收节点(single-transmission reception point,single-TRP)场景下的增益。应理解,本申请也适用于同构网络和异构网络的场景。This application applies to scenarios with single-TRP or multi-TRP, as well as scenarios derived from any of them. Referring to FIG. 4 , a multi-TRP scenario is provided for this application. Multiple TRPs 302 can be connected to the same baseband unit (baseband unit, BBU) 301, or can be connected to different BBUs 301, which are not limited in this application. The BBU in FIG. 4 takes the base station as an example, and the TRP takes the terminal device as an example for example. . An implementation form of the multi-TRP scenario in 4G is a single frequency network cell (single frequency network cell, SFN cell), and an implementation form in 5G is a hyper cell (hyper cell). It should be noted that when PUSCH adopts frequency selective precoding in this application, it is found through simulation that the gain obtained in the multi-transmission reception point (multi-transmission reception point, multi-TRP) scenario is higher than that of a single-transmission reception The gain in the node (single-transmission reception point, single-TRP) scenario. It should be understood that the present application is also applicable to scenarios of homogeneous networks and heterogeneous networks.
需要说明的是,本申请所描述的系统架构以及应用场景是为了更加清楚的说明本申请 的技术方案,并不构成对本申请提供的技术方案的限定,本领域普通技术人员可知,随着系统架构的演变和新场景的出现,本申请提供的技术方案对于类似的技术问题,同样适用。It should be noted that the system architecture and application scenarios described in this application are for the purpose of illustrating the technical solutions of this application more clearly, and do not constitute a limitation on the technical solutions provided in this application. The evolution of new scenarios and the emergence of new scenarios, the technical solutions provided in this application are also applicable to similar technical problems.
结合上述图3或图4,网络设备在调度上行数据(如用于承载上行控制信息和业务数据的PUSCH)之前需要获取信道信息。此处,需要终端设备在SRS资源上向网络设备发送SRS,网络设备通过测量终端设备发送的SRS,之后根据测量结果,可选择性能较好的SRS资源分配给终端设备,以便于终端设备发送上行数据。也就是说,网络设备可通过测量SRS,以确定上行信道质量,从而进行上行频率选择性调度。Referring to FIG. 3 or FIG. 4 above, the network device needs to acquire channel information before scheduling uplink data (eg, PUSCH used to carry uplink control information and service data). Here, the terminal equipment is required to send the SRS to the network equipment on the SRS resource, and the network equipment measures the SRS sent by the terminal equipment, and then according to the measurement result, can select the SRS resource with better performance to be allocated to the terminal equipment, so that the terminal equipment can send the uplink data. That is, the network device can measure the SRS to determine the uplink channel quality, so as to perform uplink frequency selective scheduling.
在实际应用中,终端设备接入网络后,网络设备会向终端设备发送下行参考信号或者下行信道,而且网络设备会为终端设备配置SRS资源。终端设备可基于下行参考信号或者下行信道获得适配信道的波束赋形方式,终端设备可在网络设备配置的SRS资源上采用获取到的波束赋形方式加权发送天线以发送SRS。相应地,网络设备可在相应的SRS资源上接收并测量SRS,以获得上行信道信息。应理解,网络设备为终端设备配置的SRS资源通常是多个,网络设备可基于获得的上行信道信息,从多个SRS资源中选择部分SRS资源(例如,网络设备可根据在各个SRS资源上接收到的SRS的功率或强度或信噪比(signal noise rate,SNR)等,选择信号质量较优的SRS对应的SRS资源),并通过DCI向终端设备指示选择的SRS资源。具体地:网络设备可将选择的SRS资源的索引分别指示给终端设备。可以通过SRI字段指示选择的SRS资源,不同的SRI字段指示值对应不同的SRS资源,其中,一个SRI字段可以指示一个SRS资源,也可以指示多个SRS资源,该SRI字段可以承载于DCI或者无线资源控制(radio resource control,RRC)中;终端设备可根据接收到的DCI或RRC中的SRI字段确定网络设备指示的SRS资源,以及SRS资源的数量,并根据指示的SRS资源的数量确定PUSCH的传输层数,以及每层传输层采用的波束赋形方式。也可以理解为,网络设备从终端设备确定的多个候选波束赋形方式中选择一个或多个波束赋形方式,并通过SRI字段指示给终端设备。网络设备也可以自行从多个波束赋形方式中选择一个或多个波束赋形方式,并通过SRI字段指示给终端设备。应理解,PUSCH的传输层数可随指示的SRS资源的数量动态变化。In practical applications, after the terminal device accesses the network, the network device will send a downlink reference signal or a downlink channel to the terminal device, and the network device will configure SRS resources for the terminal device. The terminal device can obtain the beamforming mode of the adapted channel based on the downlink reference signal or the downlink channel, and the terminal device can use the acquired beamforming mode on the SRS resources configured by the network device to weight the transmit antennas to transmit the SRS. Correspondingly, the network device may receive and measure the SRS on the corresponding SRS resource to obtain uplink channel information. It should be understood that there are usually multiple SRS resources configured by the network device for the terminal device, and the network device may select some SRS resources from the multiple SRS resources based on the obtained uplink channel information (for example, the network device may The power or strength of the received SRS or signal noise rate (signal noise rate, SNR), etc., select the SRS resource corresponding to the SRS with better signal quality), and indicate the selected SRS resource to the terminal equipment through DCI. Specifically: the network device may respectively indicate the index of the selected SRS resource to the terminal device. The selected SRS resource can be indicated by the SRI field, and different SRI field indication values correspond to different SRS resources. One SRI field can indicate one SRS resource or multiple SRS resources. The SRI field can be carried in DCI or wireless In resource control (radio resource control, RRC); the terminal device can determine the SRS resources indicated by the network device and the number of SRS resources according to the received SRI field in the DCI or RRC, and determine the PUSCH according to the number of the indicated SRS resources. The number of transmission layers, and the beamforming method adopted by each transmission layer. It can also be understood that the network device selects one or more beamforming modes from multiple candidate beamforming modes determined by the terminal device, and indicates to the terminal device through the SRI field. The network device can also select one or more beamforming modes from multiple beamforming modes by itself, and indicate to the terminal device through the SRI field. It should be understood that the number of transmission layers of the PUSCH may change dynamically with the indicated number of SRS resources.
为了提升上行传输谱效率和可靠性,终端设备传输PUSCH通常采用频率选择预编码的方式,也就是说,PUSCH的调度带宽被划分为PRG。网络设备可以指示多个SRI字段,每个SRI字段对应一个PRG,终端设备根据接收到的DCI中的SRI字段,确定在PUSCH的调度带宽相应PRG上发送数据时采用的波束赋形方式。结合上述图1,PUSCH1的调度指示中包括两个SRI字段,一个SRI字段对应一个PRG,因此,PUSCH1的调度带宽可被分为两个PRG。具体地,SRI字段1的指示值=0和SRI字段2的指示值=1,SRI字段1的指示值=0对应指示在PRG1上发送数据采用的波束赋形方式,SRI字段2的指示值=1的字段对应指示在PRG2上发送数据采用的波束赋形方式。进一步,可选地,终端设备可通过SRI字段指示值与SRS资源的对应关系(可参见下述关于表1至表5的介绍,此处不再复),确定出SRI字段指示值=0对应的SRS资源(为了便于描述,该SRI字段指示值=0对应的SRS资源可称为SRS资源0)、SRI字段指示值=1对应的SRS资源(为了便于描述,SRI字段指示值=1对应的SRS资源可称为SRS资源1);再确定出在SRS资源0上发送数据采用的波束赋形方式和在SRS资源1上发送数据采用的波束赋形方式,并根据在SRS资源0的发送数据采用的波束赋形方式和在SRS资源1上发送数据采用的波束赋形方式发送 PUSCH。In order to improve the spectral efficiency and reliability of the uplink transmission, the terminal device usually transmits the PUSCH by using frequency selective precoding, that is, the scheduling bandwidth of the PUSCH is divided into PRGs. The network device may indicate multiple SRI fields, each SRI field corresponds to a PRG, and the terminal device determines, according to the SRI field in the received DCI, the beamforming mode used when sending data on the PRG corresponding to the scheduling bandwidth of the PUSCH. With reference to the above FIG. 1 , the scheduling indication of PUSCH1 includes two SRI fields, and one SRI field corresponds to one PRG. Therefore, the scheduling bandwidth of PUSCH1 can be divided into two PRGs. Specifically, the indication value of SRI field 1 = 0 and the indication value of SRI field 2 = 1, the indication value of SRI field 1 = 0 corresponds to the beamforming mode used to transmit data on PRG1, and the indication value of SRI field 2 = The field of 1 corresponds to the beamforming mode used to transmit data on PRG2. Further, optionally, the terminal device may determine that the SRI field indication value=0 corresponds to the corresponding relationship between the SRI field indication value and the SRS resource (refer to the following introduction about Table 1 to Table 5, which will not be repeated here). (for the convenience of description, the SRS resource corresponding to the SRI field indication value=0 may be referred to as SRS resource 0), the SRI field indication value=1 corresponding to the SRS resource (for the convenience of description, the SRI field indication value=1 corresponding to The SRS resource may be referred to as SRS resource 1); then determine the beamforming method used to send data on SRS resource 0 and the beamforming method used to send data on SRS resource 1, and according to the data sent on SRS resource 0 The beamforming mode adopted and the beamforming mode adopted to transmit data on SRS resource 1 are used to transmit the PUSCH.
通常,PRG的粒度越小(即PRG包括的PRB数量越少),则PRG对应的波束赋形方式越精细,波束赋形方式可以更匹配传输信道,从而可使得PUSCH的传输性能越好。但是,对于相同的PUSCH的调度宽带,PRG的粒度越小,PUSCH的调度宽带包括的PRG的数量会越多,又由于一个PRG需要一个SRI字段指示,从而会导致SRI字段数量较多,会增加承载SRI字段的DCI的开销,从而会降低DCI的传输性能。参阅图5,一个PRG包括8个PRB时对应的DCI传输性能高于一个PRG包括16个PRB时对应的DCI的传输性能。特别是PUSCH的调度带宽较大的场景下,若包括较多的PRG的话,DCI的传输性能会更低。Generally, the smaller the granularity of the PRG (that is, the smaller the number of PRBs included in the PRG), the finer the beamforming mode corresponding to the PRG, and the better the beamforming mode can match the transmission channel, so that the transmission performance of the PUSCH can be better. However, for the same scheduling bandwidth of PUSCH, the smaller the granularity of the PRG, the more the number of PRGs included in the scheduling bandwidth of PUSCH, and since a PRG needs an SRI field indication, the number of SRI fields will be larger, which will increase The overhead of the DCI carrying the SRI field will reduce the transmission performance of the DCI. Referring to FIG. 5 , when one PRG includes 8 PRBs, the corresponding DCI transmission performance is higher than the corresponding DCI transmission performance when one PRG includes 16 PRBs. Especially in the scenario where the scheduling bandwidth of PUSCH is large, if more PRGs are included, the transmission performance of DCI will be lower.
鉴于此,本申请提出了一种通信方法,通过该通信方法,确定出的PRG的精确性较高,从而有助于提高PUSCH的传输性能且可减少信令开销。In view of this, the present application proposes a communication method, through which the PRG determined has high accuracy, thereby helping to improve the transmission performance of the PUSCH and reducing signaling overhead.
在介绍本申请提供的通信方法之前,首先对SRI字段指示值与SRS资源的索引之间的对应关系进行说明。Before introducing the communication method provided by the present application, the corresponding relationship between the indication value of the SRI field and the index of the SRS resource is first described.
在一种可能的实现方式中,SRI字段指示值与SRS资源的索引对应关系,可参见下述表1至表4。终端设备可预先获取到如何确定SRI字段指示值对应的SRS资源的索引的方式,例如,终端设备可预先获取到被配置的用于PUSCH信道状态信息测量的SRS资源的数量N SRS(对应表格1-4中的N SRS),其中,被配置的N SRS个SRS资源可以用于上述基于非码本的传输模式传输,N SRS可以通过RRC信令配置;以及可预先获取到通过SRI字段指示的SRS资源的最大数量,并根据上述信息确定从表1至表4的一个表解读SRI字段的指示信息。本申请中,表1至表4中,一个指示的SRS资源可以对应一个PUSCH的传输层,或者,多个指示的SRS资源对应一个PUSCH传输层。 In a possible implementation manner, the corresponding relationship between the indication value of the SRI field and the index of the SRS resource may refer to Table 1 to Table 4 below. The terminal device can obtain in advance the method of how to determine the index of the SRS resource corresponding to the value indicated by the SRI field. For example, the terminal device can obtain in advance the number of SRS resources configured for PUSCH channel state information measurement N SRS (corresponding to Table 1). NSRS in -4), wherein the configured NSRS SRS resources can be used for the above-mentioned non-codebook-based transmission mode transmission, and the NSRS can be configured through RRC signaling; and the information indicated by the SRI field can be obtained in advance The maximum number of SRS resources, and the indication information for interpreting the SRI field from one of Table 1 to Table 4 is determined according to the above information. In this application, in Tables 1 to 4, one indicated SRS resource may correspond to one PUSCH transmission layer, or multiple indicated SRS resources may correspond to one PUSCH transmission layer.
需要说明的是,终端设备获取SRI字段指示值与SRS资源的索引对应关系可以是网络设备通知终端设备的,也可以是协议预先定的,也可以是网络设备和终端设备预先约定的,本申请对此不做限定。It should be noted that the corresponding relationship between the index value of the SRI field and the SRS resource obtained by the terminal device may be notified by the network device to the terminal device, or may be predetermined by the protocol, or may be predetermined by the network device and the terminal device. This is not limited.
表1可以选择的SRS资源的最大数量为1,SRI字段指示值的含义Table 1 The maximum number of SRS resources that can be selected is 1, and the meaning of the value indicated by the SRI field
Figure PCTCN2021112454-appb-000002
Figure PCTCN2021112454-appb-000002
表2可以选择的SRS资源的最大数量为2时,SRI字段指示值的含义Table 2 When the maximum number of SRS resources that can be selected is 2, the meaning of the value indicated by the SRI field
Figure PCTCN2021112454-appb-000003
Figure PCTCN2021112454-appb-000003
Figure PCTCN2021112454-appb-000004
Figure PCTCN2021112454-appb-000004
表3可以选择的SRS资源的最大数量为3时,SRI字段指示值的含义Table 3 When the maximum number of SRS resources that can be selected is 3, the meaning of the value indicated by the SRI field
Figure PCTCN2021112454-appb-000005
Figure PCTCN2021112454-appb-000005
表4可以选择的SRS资源的最大数量为4时,SRI字段指示值的含义Table 4 When the maximum number of SRS resources that can be selected is 4, the meaning of the value indicated by the SRI field
Figure PCTCN2021112454-appb-000006
Figure PCTCN2021112454-appb-000006
Figure PCTCN2021112454-appb-000007
Figure PCTCN2021112454-appb-000007
从上述表1至表4可以确定出:当可以选择的SRS资源的最大数量为1时,可从表1中确定SRI字段指示值所指示的SRS资源的索引,每一个SRI字段指示值对应的SRS资源数量均为1;当可以选择的SRS资源的最大数量为2时,可从表2中确定SRI字段指示值所指示的SRS资源的索引,每一个SRI字段指示值对应的SRS资源数量可以为1至2;当可以选择的SRS资源的最大数量为3时,可从表3中确定SRI字段指示值所指示的SRS资源的索引,每一个SRI字段指示值对应的SRS资源数量可以为1至3;当可以选择的SRS资源的最大数量为4时,可从表4中确定SRI字段指示值所指示的SRS资源的索引,每一个SRI字段指示值对应的SRS资源数量可以为1至4。表1至表4是对应关系的示意,在实施过程中,可以是类似的对应关系或对应关系集合,或者上述对应关系中的部分。一个实施方式中,网络设备或终端设备可以存储上述对应关系。一个实施方式中,在表1至表4的对应关系在某些情况下是相同的,例如同样的字段指示值与同样的N srs是相同的,也可以合并为一个对应关系集合。 It can be determined from the above Tables 1 to 4: when the maximum number of SRS resources that can be selected is 1, the index of the SRS resource indicated by the SRI field indication value can be determined from Table 1, and each SRI field indication value corresponds to The number of SRS resources is 1; when the maximum number of SRS resources that can be selected is 2, the index of the SRS resources indicated by the SRI field indication value can be determined from Table 2, and the number of SRS resources corresponding to each SRI field indication value can be is 1 to 2; when the maximum number of SRS resources that can be selected is 3, the index of the SRS resources indicated by the SRI field indication value can be determined from Table 3, and the number of SRS resources corresponding to each SRI field indication value can be 1 to 3; when the maximum number of SRS resources that can be selected is 4, the index of the SRS resource indicated by the SRI field indication value can be determined from Table 4, and the number of SRS resources corresponding to each SRI field indication value can be 1 to 4 . Tables 1 to 4 are schematic representations of the correspondences, and in the implementation process, they may be similar correspondences or sets of correspondences, or parts of the foregoing correspondences. In one embodiment, the network device or the terminal device may store the above-mentioned correspondence. In one embodiment, the corresponding relationships in Tables 1 to 4 are the same in some cases, for example, the same field indication value and the same N srs are the same, and can also be combined into a corresponding relationship set.
应理解,上述表1至表4仅是示例性地的示出了SRI字段指示值与SRS资源的索引对应关系的一种可能的实现方式。另外,不同的表对应的SRI字段比特数不同。It should be understood that the above-mentioned Tables 1 to 4 are only exemplary implementations showing the corresponding relationship between the SRI field indication value and the index of the SRS resource. In addition, the number of bits of the SRI field corresponding to different tables is different.
进一步,当可以选择的SRS资源的最大数量为1、配置的SRS资源的数量N SRS=2时,可根据表1的前两列确定SRI字段指示值指示的SRS资源的索引。例如,当SRI字段指示值=0,则指示的SRS资源的索引为0(称为SRS资源0),即该SRI字段指示SRS资源0;当SRI字段指示值=1,则指示的SRS资源的索引为1(称为SRS资源1),即该SRI字段指示SRS资源1。当可以选择的SRS资源的最大数量为1、配置的SRS资源的数量N SRS=3时,可以根据表1的第3列和第4列,确定SRI字段指示值的SRS资源的索引。例如,当 SRI字段指示值=0,则指示的SRS资源的索引为0(称为SRS资源0),即该SRI字段指示SRS资源0;当SRI字段指示值=1,则指示的SRS资源的索引为1(称为SRS资源1),即该SRI字段指示SRS资源1;当SRI字段指示值=2,则指示的SRS资源的索引为2(称为SRS资源2),即该SRI字段指示SRS资源2;当SRI字段指示值=3,则指示的SRS资源的索引为3(称为SRS资源3),即该SRI字段指示SRS资源3。 Further, when the maximum number of SRS resources that can be selected is 1 and the number of configured SRS resources N SRS = 2, the index of the SRS resource indicated by the SRI field indication value can be determined according to the first two columns of Table 1. For example, when the indicated value of the SRI field = 0, the index of the indicated SRS resource is 0 (called SRS resource 0), that is, the SRI field indicates SRS resource 0; when the indicated value of the SRI field = 1, the indicated SRS resource has an index of 0. The index is 1 (called SRS resource 1), that is, the SRI field indicates SRS resource 1. When the maximum number of selectable SRS resources is 1 and the number of configured SRS resources N SRS = 3, the index of the SRS resource of the value indicated by the SRI field can be determined according to the third and fourth columns of Table 1. For example, when the indicated value of the SRI field = 0, the index of the indicated SRS resource is 0 (called SRS resource 0), that is, the SRI field indicates SRS resource 0; when the indicated value of the SRI field = 1, the indicated SRS resource has an index of 0. The index is 1 (called SRS resource 1), that is, the SRI field indicates SRS resource 1; when the SRI field indicates the value = 2, the index of the indicated SRS resource is 2 (called SRS resource 2), that is, the SRI field indicates SRS resource 2; when the value indicated by the SRI field = 3, the index of the indicated SRS resource is 3 (referred to as SRS resource 3), that is, the SRI field indicates SRS resource 3.
在一种可能的实现方式中,SRI字段指示值也可以用二进制数表示;例如表4也可以用下述表5表示。应理解,SRI字段指示值的具体表示形式,可以是网络设备与终端设备约定的,也可以是网络设备确定后通知终端设备的,或者也可以是协议规定的,本申请对此不做限定。In a possible implementation manner, the value indicated by the SRI field may also be represented by a binary number; for example, Table 4 may also be represented by the following Table 5. It should be understood that the specific representation of the value indicated by the SRI field may be agreed between the network device and the terminal device, or may be determined by the network device and notified to the terminal device, or may be specified by a protocol, which is not limited in this application.
表5可以选择的SRS资源的最大数量为4时SRI字段指示值含义Table 5 Meaning of the SRI field indication value when the maximum number of SRS resources that can be selected is 4
Figure PCTCN2021112454-appb-000008
Figure PCTCN2021112454-appb-000008
本申请中,SRI字段指示的多个SRS资源可以各自对应一个PUSCH的传输层,或者是,多个SRS资源中的部分SRS资源共同对应一个PUSCH的传输层,此时,部分SRS资源中的每个SRS资源各自对应PUSCH的不同PRG。In this application, the multiple SRS resources indicated by the SRI field may each correspond to the transmission layer of one PUSCH, or some of the SRS resources in the multiple SRS resources may collectively correspond to the transmission layer of one PUSCH. Each of the SRS resources corresponds to different PRGs of the PUSCH.
示例性的,表1中,对于任意SRI字段指示值,PUSCH的传输层数均为1。Exemplarily, in Table 1, for any indicated value of the SRI field, the number of transmission layers of the PUSCH is 1.
表2中,对于任意SRI字段指示值,PUSCH的传输层数均为1,当SRI字段指示值为0-3中的任意一个时,PUSCH的调度带宽上的每个PRG均对应该SRI字段指示值所指示 的SRS资源,当SRI字段指示值为4-9中的任意一个时,PUSCH的调度带宽上存在不同PRG对应不同的SRS资源,例如当SRI字段指示值为4时,SRS资源0对应PRG 0,SRS资源1对应PRG 1。In Table 2, for any indicated value of the SRI field, the number of transmission layers of the PUSCH is 1. When the indicated value of the SRI field is any one of 0 to 3, each PRG on the scheduling bandwidth of the PUSCH corresponds to the indication of the SRI field. The SRS resource indicated by the value, when the SRI field indicates that the value is any of 4-9, there are different PRGs corresponding to different SRS resources on the scheduling bandwidth of the PUSCH. For example, when the SRI field indicates that the value is 4, the SRS resource 0 corresponds to PRG 0, SRS resource 1 corresponds to PRG 1.
表3中,与表2类似,对于任意SRI字段指示值,PUSCH的传输层数均为1,当SRI字段指示值为0-3中的任意一个时,PUSCH的调度带宽上的每个PRG均对应该SRI字段指示值所指示的SRS资源,当SRI字段指示值为4-13中的任意一个时,PUSCH的调度带宽上存在不同PRG对应不同的SRS资源,例如当SRI字段指示值为10时,SRS资源0对应PRG 0,SRS资源1对应PRG 1,SRS资源2对应PRG2。In Table 3, similar to Table 2, for any indicated value of the SRI field, the number of transmission layers of the PUSCH is 1. When the indicated value of the SRI field is any one of 0-3, each PRG on the scheduling bandwidth of the PUSCH is Corresponding to the SRS resource indicated by the indicated value of the SRI field, when the indicated value of the SRI field is any one of 4-13, there are different PRGs corresponding to different SRS resources on the scheduling bandwidth of the PUSCH, for example, when the indicated value of the SRI field is 10 , SRS resource 0 corresponds to PRG 0, SRS resource 1 corresponds to PRG 1, and SRS resource 2 corresponds to PRG2.
表4中,对于SRI字段指示值为0-13,PUSCH的传输层数为1,对于SRI字段指示值为14,PUSCH的传输层数为2。当SRI字段指示值为0-13中的任意一个时,同表1-3,当SRI字段指示值为14时,PUSCH的传输层数为2且PUSCH的调度带宽上存在不同PRG对应不同的SRS资源,例如,SRS资源0和SRS资源1对应PUSCH的传输层1,SRS资源2和SRS资源3对应PUSCH的传输层2,对于每一个PUSCH传输层,不同的SRS资源对应不同的PRG,例如SRS资源0和SRS资源2分别对应PRG 0上的PUSCH传输层1和传输层2,SRS资源1和SRS资源3分别对应PRG 1上的PUSCH传输层1和传输层2。In Table 4, for the indicated value of the SRI field, the number of transmission layers of PUSCH is 1, and the indicated value of the SRI field is 14, and the number of transmission layers of PUSCH is 2. When the indicated value of the SRI field is any one of 0-13, the same as Table 1-3, when the indicated value of the SRI field is 14, the number of transmission layers of PUSCH is 2, and there are different PRGs corresponding to different SRSs in the scheduling bandwidth of PUSCH Resource, for example, SRS resource 0 and SRS resource 1 correspond to PUSCH transmission layer 1, SRS resource 2 and SRS resource 3 correspond to PUSCH transmission layer 2, for each PUSCH transmission layer, different SRS resources correspond to different PRGs, such as SRS Resource 0 and SRS resource 2 correspond to PUSCH transmission layer 1 and transmission layer 2 on PRG 0, respectively, and SRS resource 1 and SRS resource 3 correspond to PUSCH transmission layer 1 and transmission layer 2 on PRG 1, respectively.
可以看出,仅表4中的字段指示值14可以用于指示大于一层的PUSCH传输,为了提高网络设备指示PUSCH波束赋形方式的灵活度,进一步可针对PUSCH传输层数大于1的情况,设计表6,表6中存在多个字段指示值指示PUSCH传输层数大于1时的波束赋形方式。It can be seen that only the field indication value 14 in Table 4 can be used to indicate the PUSCH transmission with more than one layer. In order to improve the flexibility of the network device to indicate the PUSCH beamforming mode, it can further be used for the case where the number of PUSCH transmission layers is greater than 1. Table 6 is designed. There are multiple field indication values in Table 6 to indicate the beamforming mode when the number of PUSCH transmission layers is greater than 1.
表6 PUSCH的传输层数=2时,SRI字段指示值的含义Table 6 When the number of transmission layers of PUSCH = 2, the meaning of the value indicated by the SRI field
Figure PCTCN2021112454-appb-000009
Figure PCTCN2021112454-appb-000009
需要说明的是,本申请提供的通信方法可以应用于如上图3所示的通信系统或者图4所示的应用场景。另外,该方法可由两个通信装置执行,这两个通信装置例如为第一通信装置和第二通信装置,其中,第一通信装置可以是终端设备或可应用于终端设备的模块,例如芯片。第二通信装置可以是网络设备或可应用于网络设备的模块,例如芯片。下面以第一通信装置是终端设备、第二通信装置是网络设备为例,对本申请提供的方法进行描述。It should be noted that the communication method provided by the present application may be applied to the communication system shown in FIG. 3 or the application scenario shown in FIG. 4 . In addition, the method may be performed by two communication devices, such as a first communication device and a second communication device, wherein the first communication device may be a terminal device or a module applicable to the terminal device, such as a chip. The second communication device may be a network device or a module applicable to the network device, such as a chip. The method provided by the present application will be described below by taking the example that the first communication device is a terminal device and the second communication device is a network device.
下面参考图6,为本申请提供的一种通信方法的方法流程示意图。该方法包括以下步骤:Referring to FIG. 6 below, it is a schematic flowchart of a method of a communication method provided by the present application. The method includes the following steps:
步骤601,网络设备确定第一信息和第二信息。Step 601, the network device determines the first information and the second information.
此处,所述第一信息用于指示SRS资源的跳频带宽,所述第二信息用于指示所述SRS资源中部分或者全部SRS资源的索引。Here, the first information is used to indicate the frequency hopping bandwidth of the SRS resources, and the second information is used to indicate indexes of some or all of the SRS resources in the SRS resources.
其中,SRS资源的跳频带宽指:对于同一个SRS资源,在时域上有多次传输,每次传输所占用的频域资源不同,一次传输所占用的频域资源(或称为带宽或RB数)即为跳频带宽。Among them, the frequency hopping bandwidth of the SRS resource refers to: for the same SRS resource, there are multiple transmissions in the time domain, the frequency domain resources occupied by each transmission are different, and the frequency domain resources occupied by one transmission (or called bandwidth or RB number) is the frequency hopping bandwidth.
结合上述图2,网络设备可为终端设备配置4个SRS资源,4个SRS资源的索引为0-3,可称为SRS资源0、SRS资源1、SRS资源2和SRS资源3;第一信息可用于指示每个SRS资源(即SRS资源0、SRS资源1、SRS资源2和SRS资源3)的跳频带宽均为16个PRB、且每个跳频带宽所占的PRB位置如图2所示。2, the network device can configure 4 SRS resources for the terminal device, and the indexes of the 4 SRS resources are 0-3, which can be called SRS resource 0, SRS resource 1, SRS resource 2 and SRS resource 3; the first information It can be used to indicate that the frequency hopping bandwidth of each SRS resource (that is, SRS resource 0, SRS resource 1, SRS resource 2 and SRS resource 3) is 16 PRBs, and the PRB position occupied by each frequency hopping bandwidth is shown in Figure 2. Show.
应理解,第一信息指示的SRS资源的跳频带宽也可为4个PRB,8个PRB,或者32个PRB等,通常,跳频带宽的大小与终端设备的上行覆盖性能相关,当上行覆盖性能较差时,跳频带宽包括的PRB数量通常较小;反之,当上行覆盖性能较优时,跳频带宽包括的PRB数量通常较大。每个PRB均包括12个子载波,每个子载波对应的带宽可以为15kHz或者30kHz或者60kHz或者120kHz等;SRS资源占用的总PRB数量可以为系统带宽或者BWP或者载波占用的PRB总数,可以小于该PRB数量;通常,为了保证SRS发送性能,会配置每个跳频带宽内包括的PRB均是连续的;跳频规则是指,预先定义的每个OFDM符号上的跳频带宽的位置,不同OFDM符号上的跳频带宽是不重叠的。It should be understood that the frequency hopping bandwidth of the SRS resource indicated by the first information can also be 4 PRBs, 8 PRBs, or 32 PRBs, etc. Generally, the size of the frequency hopping bandwidth is related to the uplink coverage performance of the terminal equipment. When the performance is poor, the number of PRBs included in the frequency hopping bandwidth is usually smaller; on the contrary, when the uplink coverage performance is better, the number of PRBs included in the frequency hopping bandwidth is usually larger. Each PRB includes 12 subcarriers, and the corresponding bandwidth of each subcarrier can be 15kHz or 30kHz or 60kHz or 120kHz; the total number of PRBs occupied by SRS resources can be the system bandwidth or BWP or the total number of PRBs occupied by the carrier, which can be smaller than the PRB Usually, in order to ensure the SRS transmission performance, the PRBs included in each frequency hopping bandwidth are configured to be continuous; the frequency hopping rule refers to the pre-defined position of the frequency hopping bandwidth on each OFDM symbol, different OFDM symbols The frequency hopping bandwidths are non-overlapping.
进一步,可选地,网络设备可基于来自终端设备的SRS信号强度或者功率大小,从配置的多个SRS资源中选择SRS资源;第二信息可用于指示选择的SRS资源的索引。应理解,选择的SRS资源可以是SRS资源集合中的部分或全部,SRS资源集合中包括至少一个SRS资源,该SRS资源集合为基于非码本上行传输的资源集合,该资源集合中的SRS资源通过RRC信令配置,包括配置每个SRS资源的索引、跳频带宽配置、功率信息配置、序列配置等。例如,第二信息可以为SRI字段,其SRI字段指示值的含义可参见上述表1-4以及表6。Further, optionally, the network device may select the SRS resource from the configured multiple SRS resources based on the strength or power of the SRS signal from the terminal device; the second information may be used to indicate the index of the selected SRS resource. It should be understood that the selected SRS resource may be part or all of the SRS resource set, the SRS resource set includes at least one SRS resource, and the SRS resource set is a resource set based on non-codebook uplink transmission, and the SRS resource in the resource set Configuration through RRC signaling includes configuring the index of each SRS resource, frequency hopping bandwidth configuration, power information configuration, sequence configuration, etc. For example, the second information may be an SRI field, and the meaning of the value indicated by the SRI field may refer to Tables 1-4 and Table 6 above.
在一种可能的实现方式中,第一信息可包括SRS资源的跳频带宽大小配置信息、SRS资源占用的总PRB的数量、每个PRB的位置配置信息以及跳频规则,为终端设备配置SRS资源的跳频带宽。需要说明的,第一信息包括可以指示出SRS资源在每次传输所占用的PRB的位置和数量的信息即可,可以包括上述示例出的信息,也可以包括其他信息,本申请对此不做限定。In a possible implementation manner, the first information may include the frequency hopping bandwidth size configuration information of the SRS resources, the total number of PRBs occupied by the SRS resources, the location configuration information of each PRB, and the frequency hopping rules, and configure the SRS for the terminal device. The hopping bandwidth of the resource. It should be noted that the first information includes information that can indicate the position and number of PRBs occupied by the SRS resources in each transmission. It can include the information exemplified above, or other information, which this application does not do. limited.
步骤602,网络设备向终端设备发送第一信息和第二信息。相应地,终端设备接收来自网络设备的第一信息和第二信息。Step 602, the network device sends the first information and the second information to the terminal device. Accordingly, the terminal device receives the first information and the second information from the network device.
此处,在一种可能的实现方式中,第一信息可以携带在无线资源控制(radio resource control,RRC)信令中,第二信息可以携带在DCI信令。通常,网络设备可先向终端设备发送RRC信令,后发送DCI信令。在另一种可能方式中,第一信息和第二信息也可以携带在同一消息中。Here, in a possible implementation manner, the first information may be carried in radio resource control (radio resource control, RRC) signaling, and the second information may be carried in DCI signaling. Generally, the network device may first send the RRC signaling to the terminal device, and then send the DCI signaling. In another possible manner, the first information and the second information may also be carried in the same message.
步骤603,终端设备可根据第一信息和第二信息,确定PUSCH的调度带宽对应的N个PRG,N为正整数。Step 603, the terminal device may determine N PRGs corresponding to the scheduling bandwidth of the PUSCH according to the first information and the second information, where N is a positive integer.
此处,终端设备确定PUSCH的调度带宽对应的N个PRG是指:确定PUSCH的调度带宽对应的PRG的数量N,以及N个PRG中每个PRG包括的PRB数量以及每个PRG包括的PRB的起始位置和终止位置,可能的确定方式可参见下述实现方式一和实现方式二,此处不再赘述。Here, determining the N PRGs corresponding to the scheduling bandwidth of the PUSCH by the terminal device refers to: determining the number N of PRGs corresponding to the scheduling bandwidth of the PUSCH, the number of PRBs included in each PRG in the N PRGs, and the number of PRBs included in each PRG. For the possible determination methods of the starting position and the ending position, reference may be made to the following implementation manners 1 and 2, which will not be repeated here.
应理解,上述确定PUSCH的调度带宽对应的N个PRG可以有多种方式或其它形式,举例说明,该步骤603也可以为,终端设备可根据第一信息和第二信息,确定PUSCH的调度带宽可被划分的N个PRB的集合,每个PRB集合包括的PRB的起始位置和终止位置。It should be understood that the above-mentioned determination of the N PRGs corresponding to the scheduling bandwidth of the PUSCH may have various methods or other forms. For example, step 603 may also be that the terminal device may determine the scheduling bandwidth of the PUSCH according to the first information and the second information. A set of N PRBs that can be divided, and each PRB set includes the starting position and ending position of the PRB.
该步骤603还可以为,终端设备可根据第一信息和第二信息,确定PUSCH采用的波束赋形方式的频域粒度。例如,PUSCH的调度带宽被划分为N个PRG,每个PRG作为波束赋形方式的频域粒度,在PRG内,采用同一个波束赋形方式;不同的PRG,可以采用不同的波束赋形方式。可选的,每个PRG采用的波束赋形方式也根据第一信息和第二信息确定。在一种可能的实现方式中,上述N个PRG中每个PRG对应SRS资源的一个跳频带宽。应理解,一个PRG对应一个SRS的跳频带宽是指:PUSCH的PRG占用的带宽与SRS的跳频带宽相同,或者PUSCH对应的PRG占用的带宽为SRS的跳频带宽的子集(即SRS的跳频带宽包含对应的PUSCH的PRG)。In step 603, the terminal device may determine, according to the first information and the second information, the frequency domain granularity of the beamforming manner adopted by the PUSCH. For example, the scheduling bandwidth of PUSCH is divided into N PRGs, and each PRG is used as the frequency domain granularity of the beamforming method. Within the PRG, the same beamforming method is used; different PRGs can use different beamforming methods. . Optionally, the beamforming mode adopted by each PRG is also determined according to the first information and the second information. In a possible implementation manner, each PRG in the above N PRGs corresponds to a frequency hopping bandwidth of the SRS resource. It should be understood that the frequency hopping bandwidth of one PRG corresponding to one SRS refers to: the bandwidth occupied by the PRG of the PUSCH is the same as the frequency hopping bandwidth of the SRS, or the bandwidth occupied by the PRG corresponding to the PUSCH is a subset of the frequency hopping bandwidth of the SRS (that is, the frequency hopping bandwidth of the SRS). The frequency hopping bandwidth contains the PRG of the corresponding PUSCH).
下面,将对确定出的N个PRG满足的关系做出具体介绍。在一种可能的实现方式中,N个PRG中存在两个PRG之间满足以下关系1和/或关系2。关系1(以频域上相邻的第一PRG和第二PRG为例),第一PRG中频率最低的PRB与第二PRG中频率最高的PRB分别对应SRS资源的不同跳频带宽;第一PRG和第二PRG为N个PRG中频域上相邻的两个PRG,第一PRG中频率最低的PRB与第二PRG中频率最高的PRB为PUSCH的调度带宽上相邻的两个PRB。Next, the relationship satisfied by the determined N PRGs will be introduced in detail. In a possible implementation manner, the following relation 1 and/or relation 2 is satisfied between two PRGs in the N PRGs. Relation 1 (taking the adjacent first PRG and second PRG in the frequency domain as an example), the PRB with the lowest frequency in the first PRG and the PRB with the highest frequency in the second PRG respectively correspond to different frequency hopping bandwidths of the SRS resources; The PRG and the second PRG are two adjacent PRGs in the frequency domain in the N PRGs, and the PRB with the lowest frequency in the first PRG and the PRB with the highest frequency in the second PRG are two PRBs adjacent in the scheduling bandwidth of the PUSCH.
或者,第一PRG中频率最高的PRB与第二PRG中频率最低的PRB分别对应SRS资源的不同跳频带宽;其中,第一PRG和第二PRG为N个PRG中频域上相邻的两个PRG,第一PRG中频率最高的PRB与第二PRG中频率最低的PRB为PUSCH的调度带宽上相邻的两个PRB。Or, the PRB with the highest frequency in the first PRG and the PRB with the lowest frequency in the second PRG respectively correspond to different frequency hopping bandwidths of the SRS resources; wherein the first PRG and the second PRG are two adjacent ones in the frequency domain among the N PRGs PRG, the PRB with the highest frequency in the first PRG and the PRB with the lowest frequency in the second PRG are two adjacent PRBs on the scheduling bandwidth of the PUSCH.
示例性地,以PUSCH的调度带宽包括PRB 0、PRB 1、PRB 2……PRB m为例,其中,PRB 0、PRB 1、PRB 2……PRB m是按频率由高到低或由低到高的顺序排列的。若PRB 0为PUSCH的调度带宽中频率最低的PRB,则PRB m为PUSCH的调度带宽中频率最高的PRB;若PRB 0为PUSCH的调度带宽中频率最高的PRB,则PRB m为PUSCH的调度带宽中频率最低的PRB。通常,PUSCH的调度带宽所包含的PRB的编号是连续的,相邻两个PRB是指编号连续的两个PRB,例如,PRB 0和PRB 1是相邻两个PRB,PRB 1和PRB 2是相邻两个PRB,等。需要说明的是,上述两种情况仅仅是编号不同,对于终端识别不同的PRB可以有各自的方式实现。一个实施例中,PUSCH的调度带宽包括的PRB的编号也可能是不连续的,例如,PUSCH的调度带宽包括PRB 0、PRB 2、PRB 5、PRB 6……,其中,相邻两个PRB是 指编号相邻的两个PRB,例如PRB 0和PRB 2为相邻两个PRB,PRB 2和PRB 5为相邻两个PRB,等。 Exemplarily, take the scheduling bandwidth of PUSCH including PRB 0 , PRB 1 , PRB 2 ...... PRB m as an example, where PRB 0 , PRB 1 , PRB 2 ...... PRB m is from high to low or from low to low in frequency Arranged in high order. If PRB 0 is the PRB with the lowest frequency in the scheduling bandwidth of PUSCH, then PRB m is the PRB with the highest frequency in the scheduling bandwidth of PUSCH; if PRB 0 is the PRB with the highest frequency in the scheduling bandwidth of PUSCH, then PRB m is the scheduling bandwidth of PUSCH PRB with the lowest frequency in the middle. Usually, the numbers of PRBs included in the scheduling bandwidth of the PUSCH are consecutive, and two adjacent PRBs refer to two consecutive PRBs. For example, PRB 0 and PRB 1 are two adjacent PRBs, and PRB 1 and PRB 2 are two consecutive PRBs. two adjacent PRBs, etc. It should be noted that, the above two cases are only different in numbers, and there may be separate ways for the terminal to identify different PRBs. In one embodiment, the numbers of PRBs included in the scheduling bandwidth of PUSCH may also be discontinuous. For example, the scheduling bandwidth of PUSCH includes PRB 0 , PRB 2 , PRB 5 , PRB 6 . . . Refers to two adjacent PRBs numbered, for example, PRB 0 and PRB 2 are two adjacent PRBs, PRB 2 and PRB 5 are two adjacent PRBs, and so on.
为可便于方案的说明,如下以PUSCH的调度带宽包括PRB 0、PRB 1、PRB 2……PRB 7,PRB 0、PRB 1、PRB 2……PRB 7是按频率由高到低或由低到高的顺序排列的为例。请参阅图7a,第一个PRG为PRG0、第二个PRG为PRG1、第三个PRG为PRG2、第四个PRG为PRG3,其中,PRG0包括PRB 0和PRB 1,PRG1包括PRB 2和PRB 3,PRG2包括PRB 4和PRB 5,PRG3包括PRB 6和PRB 7。若PUSCH的调度带宽包括的PRB 0、PRB 1、PRB 2……PRB 7是按频率由低到高的顺序排列,则第一PRG为PRG1,第二PRG为PRG2,PRG1中包含的PRB均对应SRS资源的跳频带宽1而不对应SRS资源的跳频带宽2,也就是说,PRG1与SRS资源的跳频带宽1频域重叠而不与SRS资源的跳频带宽2频域重叠;PRG2中包含的PRB均对应SRS资源的跳频带宽2而不对应SRS资源的跳频带宽1,也就是说,PRG2与SRS资源的跳频带宽2频域重叠而不与SRS资源的跳频带宽1频域重叠。若PUSCH的调度带宽包括的PRB 0、PRB 1、PRB 2……PRB 7是按频率由高到低的顺序排列,则第一PRG为PRG2,第二PRG为PRG1,PRG1和PRG2对应SRS资源的不同跳频带宽,PRG1和PRG2对应的SRS资源的跳频带宽可参见前述相关描述,此处不再赘述。 In order to facilitate the description of the scheme, the scheduling bandwidth of PUSCH includes PRB 0 , PRB 1 , PRB 2 ...... PRB 7 , PRB 0 , PRB 1 , PRB 2 ...... PRB 7 is from high to low or from low to low in frequency as follows For example, the order of the highest. Referring to Figure 7a, the first PRG is PRG0, the second PRG is PRG1, the third PRG is PRG2, and the fourth PRG is PRG3, where PRG0 includes PRB 0 and PRB 1 , and PRG1 includes PRB 2 and PRB 3 , PRG2 includes PRB 4 and PRB 5 , and PRG3 includes PRB 6 and PRB 7 . If the PRB 0 , PRB 1 , PRB 2 ...... PRB 7 included in the scheduling bandwidth of the PUSCH are arranged in order of frequency from low to high, the first PRG is PRG1, the second PRG is PRG2, and the PRBs included in PRG1 correspond to The frequency hopping bandwidth 1 of the SRS resource does not correspond to the frequency hopping bandwidth 2 of the SRS resource, that is, the frequency domain of PRG1 overlaps with the frequency hopping bandwidth 1 of the SRS resource but does not overlap the frequency domain of the frequency hopping bandwidth 2 of the SRS resource; The included PRBs all correspond to the frequency hopping bandwidth 2 of the SRS resource but do not correspond to the frequency hopping bandwidth 1 of the SRS resource, that is to say, the PRG2 overlaps with the frequency hopping bandwidth 2 of the SRS resource and does not overlap with the frequency hopping bandwidth 1 of the SRS resource. Domain overlap. If the PRB 0 , PRB 1 , PRB 2 , ... PRB 7 included in the scheduling bandwidth of the PUSCH are arranged in the order of frequency from high to low, the first PRG is PRG2, the second PRG is PRG1, and PRG1 and PRG2 correspond to SRS resources. For different frequency hopping bandwidths, for the frequency hopping bandwidths of the SRS resources corresponding to PRG1 and PRG2, reference may be made to the foregoing related descriptions, which will not be repeated here.
关系2(以第三PRG和第四PRG为例),第三PRG和第四PRG对应SRS资源的同一个跳频带宽,且第三PRG和第四PRG对应第二信息指示的SRS资源的索引不同;其中,第三PRG和第四PRG为N个PRG中对应同一个SRS资源的跳频带宽的任意两个PRG。应理解的,一个SRS资源的跳频带宽包括第三PRG和第四PRG。Relationship 2 (taking the third PRG and the fourth PRG as an example), the third PRG and the fourth PRG correspond to the same frequency hopping bandwidth of the SRS resource, and the third PRG and the fourth PRG correspond to the index of the SRS resource indicated by the second information The third PRG and the fourth PRG are any two PRGs corresponding to the frequency hopping bandwidth of the same SRS resource among the N PRGs. It should be understood that the frequency hopping bandwidth of one SRS resource includes the third PRG and the fourth PRG.
结合上述图7a,第二信息指示SRS资源的索引为0(称为SRS资源0)和1(称为SRS资源1);在SRS资源的跳频带宽1内,PRG0为第三PRG且PRG1为第四PRG,PRG0对应第二信息指示的SRS资源0,PRG1对应第二信息指示的SRS资源1。在SRS资源的跳频带宽2内,PRG2为第三PRG且PRG3为第四PRG,PRG2对应第二信息指示的SRS资源0,PRG3对应第二信息指示的SRS资源1。应理解的,一个PRG对应一个SRS资源的索引是指:在该PRG上发送PUSCH采用的波束赋形方式根据对应的SRS资源的索引确定的。终端设备在该SRS资源上发送SRS采用的波束赋形方式,用于发送对应的PRG上的PUSCH。7a, the second information indicates that the indices of the SRS resources are 0 (referred to as SRS resource 0) and 1 (referred to as SRS resource 1); within the frequency hopping bandwidth 1 of the SRS resource, PRG0 is the third PRG and PRG1 is The fourth PRG, PRG0 corresponds to SRS resource 0 indicated by the second information, and PRG1 corresponds to SRS resource 1 indicated by the second information. Within the frequency hopping bandwidth 2 of the SRS resource, PRG2 is the third PRG and PRG3 is the fourth PRG, PRG2 corresponds to SRS resource 0 indicated by the second information, and PRG3 corresponds to SRS resource 1 indicated by the second information. It should be understood that the index of one PRG corresponding to one SRS resource means that the beamforming manner used for transmitting the PUSCH on the PRG is determined according to the index of the corresponding SRS resource. The beamforming mode used by the terminal device to send the SRS on the SRS resource is used to send the PUSCH on the corresponding PRG.
需要说明的是,第三PRG和第四PRG中的一个可以与第一PRG相同,或者与第二PRG相同。例如,第三PRG与第一PRG相同,第四PRG与第二PRG不同;再比如,第三PRG与第二PRG相同,第四PRG与第一PRG不同。It should be noted that, one of the third PRG and the fourth PRG may be the same as the first PRG or the same as the second PRG. For example, the third PRG is the same as the first PRG, and the fourth PRG is different from the second PRG; for another example, the third PRG is the same as the second PRG, and the fourth PRG is different from the first PRG.
应理解,上述图7a所示PUSCH中的4个PRG中频域上相邻的两个PRG之间满足存在关系1的第一PRG和第二PRG,也存在满足关系2的第三PRG和第四PRG。当然,PUSCH中的N个PRG中频域上相邻的两个PRG之间可能仅存在满足上述关系1的第一PRG和第二PRG,可参见图7b中的PUSCH3,其中,PRG0为第一PRG,PRG1为第二PRG;PUSCH中的N个PRG中频域上相邻的两个PRG之间可能仅存在满足上述关系2的第三PRG和第四PRG,可参见图7b中的PUSCH4,其中,PRG0为第三PRG,PRG1为第四PRG。需要说明的是,PUSCH3中的PRG0和PRG1均对应第二指示信息指示的SRS资源0,但是PRG0对应的SRS资源的跳频带宽与PRG1对应的SRS资源的跳频带宽不同,因此,PUSCH3中的PRG0和PRG1对应不同的波束赋形方式。PUSCH4中的PRG0和PRG1对应的SRS资源的跳频带宽相同,但是第二信息指示SRS资源0和SRS资源1,因此, PUSCH4中的PRG0和PRG1对应也对应不同的波束赋形方式。It should be understood that among the four PRGs in the PUSCH shown in FIG. 7a, the first PRG and the second PRG that satisfy the relationship 1 between the two adjacent PRGs in the frequency domain also exist, and there are also the third PRG and the fourth PRG that satisfy the relationship 2. prg. Of course, among the N PRGs in the PUSCH, there may only be the first PRG and the second PRG that satisfy the above relationship 1 between two PRGs that are adjacent in the frequency domain. Please refer to PUSCH3 in Fig. 7b, where PRG0 is the first PRG , PRG1 is the second PRG; among the N PRGs in the PUSCH, there may only be a third PRG and a fourth PRG that satisfy the above relationship 2 between the two PRGs that are adjacent in the frequency domain. See PUSCH4 in FIG. 7b , where, PRG0 is the third PRG, and PRG1 is the fourth PRG. It should be noted that both PRG0 and PRG1 in PUSCH3 correspond to SRS resource 0 indicated by the second indication information, but the frequency hopping bandwidth of the SRS resource corresponding to PRG0 is different from the frequency hopping bandwidth of the SRS resource corresponding to PRG1. PRG0 and PRG1 correspond to different beamforming methods. The frequency hopping bandwidths of the SRS resources corresponding to PRG0 and PRG1 in PUSCH4 are the same, but the second information indicates SRS resource 0 and SRS resource 1. Therefore, PRG0 and PRG1 in PUSCH4 also correspond to different beamforming modes.
在一种可能的实现方式中,第二信息可以为SRI。进一步,可选地,SRI字段指示值与SRS资源的索引之间满足的对应关系可参见上述表1至表4和表6的相关描述,此处不再重复赘述。也就是说,SRI字段指示值可复用现有SRI指示字段指示值(表1至4),也可以根据实际需求设计新的对应关系(如表6)。以上述表4为例,当SRI字段指示值取0至3时,一个SRI字段指示值指示一个SRS资源;当SRI字段指示值取4至14时,一个SRI字段指示值指示多个SRS资源。In a possible implementation manner, the second information may be SRI. Further, optionally, for the corresponding relationship satisfied between the SRI field indication value and the index of the SRS resource, reference may be made to the relevant descriptions in Table 1 to Table 4 and Table 6 above, which will not be repeated here. That is to say, the indication value of the SRI field may reuse the indication value of the existing SRI indication field (Tables 1 to 4), or a new corresponding relationship (such as Table 6) may be designed according to actual requirements. Taking the above Table 4 as an example, when the SRI field indicator value is 0 to 3, one SRI field indicator value indicates one SRS resource; when the SRI field indicator value is 4 to 14, one SRI field indicator value indicates multiple SRS resources.
进一步,可选地,当限定PUSCH的传输层数为1时,SRI字段指示值指示的SRS资源的索引与PRG一一对应,且SRI字段指示值指示的SRS资源的索引由小到大的顺序依次对应频域由小到大或由大到小的PRG。限定PUSCH的传输层数可以是协议预先定义的,也可以是网络设备通过信令显式或通过其他参数隐式指示的,该信令可以是RRC信令或者DCI信令。例如,网络设备通过RRC信令指示PUSCH的传输层数限制为1,则,当采用表2且SRI指示值为4时,SRS资源0和SRS资源1分别对应不同的PRG。结合上述图7a,第一个PRG和第二PRG对应同一个SRS资源的跳频带宽。SRI字段指示值指示的SRS资源的索引为0和1,SRS资源的索引为0对应第一个PRG,SRS资源的索引为1对应第二个PRG。即第一个PRG对应SRI字段指示值指示的第一个SRS资源,第二个PRG对应SRI字段指示值指示的第二个SRS资源。相比于现有技术中,每个SRS资源的索引依次对应一个PRG,需要网络设备遍历指示的多个SRS资源的所有组合和顺序。例如,N SRS=4时,SRI需要指示的状态数量为
Figure PCTCN2021112454-appb-000010
种。通过本申请的上述方式,不存在SRI字段指示值指示的SRS资源相同但顺序不同的问题。因此,SRI字段可以只指示SRS资源组合,无需指示SRS资源的排序。
Further, optionally, when the number of transmission layers of the PUSCH is limited to 1, the index of the SRS resource indicated by the SRI field indication value corresponds to the PRG one-to-one, and the index of the SRS resource indicated by the SRI field indication value is in descending order. Corresponding to the frequency domain from small to large or from large to small PRG in turn. The number of transmission layers limiting the PUSCH may be predefined by the protocol, or may be indicated by the network device explicitly through signaling or implicitly through other parameters, and the signaling may be RRC signaling or DCI signaling. For example, the network device indicates through RRC signaling that the number of PUSCH transmission layers is limited to 1, then when Table 2 is used and the SRI indication value is 4, SRS resource 0 and SRS resource 1 correspond to different PRGs respectively. Referring to FIG. 7a above, the first PRG and the second PRG correspond to the frequency hopping bandwidth of the same SRS resource. The indices of the SRS resource indicated by the indication value of the SRI field are 0 and 1, the index of the SRS resource being 0 corresponds to the first PRG, and the index of the SRS resource being 1 corresponds to the second PRG. That is, the first PRG corresponds to the first SRS resource indicated by the SRI field indication value, and the second PRG corresponds to the second SRS resource indicated by the SRI field indication value. Compared with the prior art, the index of each SRS resource corresponds to one PRG in sequence, which requires the network device to traverse all combinations and sequences of the indicated multiple SRS resources. For example, when N SRS = 4, the number of states that the SRI needs to indicate is
Figure PCTCN2021112454-appb-000010
kind. With the above method of the present application, there is no problem that the SRS resources indicated by the indication value of the SRI field are the same but in different sequences. Therefore, the SRI field may only indicate the combination of SRS resources without indicating the ordering of the SRS resources.
步骤604,终端设备确定N个PRG中每个PRG对应的PUSCH的波束赋形方式。Step 604, the terminal device determines the beamforming mode of the PUSCH corresponding to each PRG in the N PRGs.
该步骤604为可选步骤。This step 604 is an optional step.
此处,每个PRG对应的PUSCH的波束赋形方式,也可以理解为,在每个PRG上发送PUSCH的波束赋形方式。Here, the beamforming manner of the PUSCH corresponding to each PRG can also be understood as the beamforming manner of transmitting the PUSCH on each PRG.
通常,SRI字段所指示的SRS资源对应一组候选波束赋形方式,候选波束赋形方式的数量为可指示的SRS资源的总数乘以SRS的跳频带宽数量。例如,以图7a为例,共配置了4个SRS资源,且每个SRS资源均配置了4次跳频,则该配置下,候选波束赋形方式的数量为16。一个SRS资源在一个跳频带宽上对应一个候选波束赋形方式,为了使得确定出的候选波束赋形方式可以适配不同带宽上的上行信道,从而保证SRS的发送性能,因此,对于同一个SRS资源在不同符号上(不同跳频带宽上)发送SRS采用的波束赋形方式,终端设备可根据相应的带宽做调整。也就是说,终端设备在不同跳频带宽上分别确定波束赋形方式,例如,根据不同跳频带宽对应的信道信息,分别做特征向量提取,形成不同的波束赋形方式。结合上述图2,同一个SRS资源在4个符号(符号1至符号4)上对应的候选波束赋形方式可以不同,每个SRS资源在4个符号上发送SRS采用的波束赋形方式互不相同。示例性地,SRS资源1在符号1至符号4上发送SRS采用的波束赋形方式可以是4个不同的波束赋形方式,SRS资源2在符号1至符号4上发送SRS所采用的波束赋形方式可以是4个不同的波束赋形方式。也可以理解为,同一个SRS资源在4个子带(或称为跳频)上采用的波束赋形方式是不同的。例如,当SRI字段指示SRS资源0,第一PRG和第二PRG均对应SRS资源0,但由于第一PRG和第二PRG对应不同的SRS资源的跳 频带宽,使得第一PRG和第二PRG对应的波束赋形方式不同。Generally, the SRS resources indicated by the SRI field correspond to a group of candidate beamforming modes, and the number of candidate beamforming modes is the total number of SRS resources that can be indicated multiplied by the number of SRS frequency hopping bandwidths. For example, taking FIG. 7a as an example, a total of 4 SRS resources are configured, and each SRS resource is configured with 4 frequency hopping, then under this configuration, the number of candidate beamforming modes is 16. One SRS resource corresponds to one candidate beamforming mode on one frequency hopping bandwidth. In order to make the determined candidate beamforming mode suitable for uplink channels on different bandwidths, so as to ensure the transmission performance of SRS, for the same SRS The beamforming method used to transmit SRS on different symbols (different frequency hopping bandwidths) of resources, and the terminal equipment can adjust it according to the corresponding bandwidth. That is to say, the terminal device determines beamforming modes respectively on different frequency hopping bandwidths. For example, according to the channel information corresponding to different frequency hopping bandwidths, eigenvector extraction is performed respectively to form different beamforming modes. 2, the candidate beamforming modes corresponding to the same SRS resource on 4 symbols (symbol 1 to symbol 4) can be different, and the beamforming modes adopted by each SRS resource to transmit SRS on 4 symbols are different from each other. same. Exemplarily, the beamforming methods used for SRS resource 1 to transmit SRS on symbols 1 to 4 may be 4 different beamforming methods, and the beamforming methods used for SRS resource 2 to transmit SRS on symbols 1 to 4 The beamforming mode can be 4 different beamforming modes. It can also be understood that the beamforming manners used for the same SRS resource on the four subbands (or called frequency hopping) are different. For example, when the SRI field indicates SRS resource 0, both the first PRG and the second PRG correspond to SRS resource 0, but since the first PRG and the second PRG correspond to different frequency hopping bandwidths of the SRS resource, the first PRG and the second PRG The corresponding beamforming methods are different.
针对如何确定每个PRG上采用的波束赋形方式,以第五PRG为例说明,第五PRG为N个PRG中的任一个。应理解,第五PRG可与第一PRG相同,或者与第二PRG相同,或者与第三PRG相同,或者与第四PRG相同。As to how to determine the beamforming mode used on each PRG, the fifth PRG is taken as an example to illustrate, and the fifth PRG is any one of the N PRGs. It should be understood that the fifth PRG may be the same as the first PRG, or the same as the second PRG, or the same as the third PRG, or the same as the fourth PRG.
在一种可能的实现方式中,终端设备可确定第五PRG对应的SRS资源的第一跳频带宽,并进一步根据SRI字段指示值(第二信息)确定第五PRG对应的SRS资源的索引,例如第五PRG对应的SRS资源称为第一SRS资源,在第五PRG上发送PUSCH的波束赋形方式为发送第一SRS的波束赋形方式,其中,发送第一SRS的波束赋形方式可以为在第一SRS资源的第一跳频带宽上发送SRS采用的波束赋形方式,即第一SRS承载于第一SRS资源的第一跳频带宽上。结合图7a,以第五PRG为以PRG3为例,PRG3对应的第一跳频带宽为:SRS资源0、SRS资源1、SRS资源2和SRS资源3在OFDM符号4的跳频带宽,进一步,PRG3对应第二信息指示的SRS资源的索引为1(称为SRS资源1),也就是说,在PRG3上发送PUSCH的波束赋形方式为:在SRS资源1上且在OFDM符号4对应的跳频带宽上发送第一SRS的波束赋形方式。In a possible implementation manner, the terminal device may determine the first frequency hopping bandwidth of the SRS resource corresponding to the fifth PRG, and further determine the index of the SRS resource corresponding to the fifth PRG according to the SRI field indication value (second information), For example, the SRS resource corresponding to the fifth PRG is called the first SRS resource, and the beamforming mode for sending the PUSCH on the fifth PRG is the beamforming mode for transmitting the first SRS, wherein the beamforming mode for transmitting the first SRS may be The beamforming mode adopted for transmitting the SRS on the first frequency hopping bandwidth of the first SRS resource, that is, the first SRS is carried on the first frequency hopping bandwidth of the first SRS resource. 7a, taking the fifth PRG as an example of PRG3, the first frequency hopping bandwidth corresponding to PRG3 is: the frequency hopping bandwidth of SRS resource 0, SRS resource 1, SRS resource 2 and SRS resource 3 in OFDM symbol 4, and further, The index of PRG3 corresponding to the SRS resource indicated by the second information is 1 (referred to as SRS resource 1), that is to say, the beamforming method for sending PUSCH on PRG3 is: on SRS resource 1 and at the hop corresponding to OFDM symbol 4 The beamforming mode for sending the first SRS over the frequency bandwidth.
进一步,可选地,所述第一SRS的传输与发送第二信息的时域间隔最小,例如发送第一SRS的第一SRS资源的时域与发送第二信息的时域间隔最小。或者也可以理解为,第一SRS资源为与发送第二信息的时域间隔最小的一次SRS资源的时域所对应的SRS资源。应理解的,由于SRS资源配置可以是周期的,即,在不同周期内的同一个跳频带宽上可能均发送SRS,此时,对于一个PRG而言,可以对应多个波束赋形方式,每个波束赋形方式对应不同周期内的同一个SRS资源的同一个跳频带宽上发送SRS采用的波束赋形方式。此时,本申请对PRG采用的波束赋形方式做进一步限定,即:将第一SRS确定为与SRI指示信息发送时刻时间间隔最小的一次SRS发送周期上的SRS。终端设备根据该周期上的相应SRS采用的波束赋形方式确定PUSCH的PRG所采用的波束赋形方式。Further, optionally, the time domain interval between the transmission of the first SRS and the transmission of the second information is the smallest, for example, the time domain interval between the transmission of the first SRS resource of the first SRS and the time domain of the transmission of the second information is the smallest. Alternatively, it can also be understood that the first SRS resource is an SRS resource corresponding to the time domain of the primary SRS resource with the smallest time domain interval for sending the second information. It should be understood that since the SRS resource configuration may be periodic, that is, SRS may be sent on the same frequency hopping bandwidth in different periods, at this time, for one PRG, it may correspond to multiple beamforming The beamforming modes correspond to the beamforming modes adopted for transmitting SRS on the same frequency hopping bandwidth of the same SRS resource in different periods. At this time, the present application further defines the beamforming mode adopted by the PRG, that is, the first SRS is determined as the SRS in the SRS transmission cycle with the smallest time interval from the time interval at which the SRI indication information is sent. The terminal device determines the beamforming mode adopted by the PRG of the PUSCH according to the beamforming mode adopted by the corresponding SRS in the period.
通过上述方式,在不同PRG发送PUSCH的波束赋形方式是根据在对应的SRS资源和相应跳频带宽上发送SRS所采用的波束赋形方式确定的,如此,可确保不同PRG的波束赋形方式是不同的,且较为适配上行传输的信道,可提升PUSCH的传输性能。In the above manner, the beamforming mode for sending PUSCH in different PRGs is determined according to the beamforming mode used for sending SRS on the corresponding SRS resources and the corresponding frequency hopping bandwidth. In this way, the beamforming mode of different PRGs can be ensured. are different, and are more suitable for the channel of uplink transmission, which can improve the transmission performance of PUSCH.
步骤605,终端设备根据N个PRG发送PUSCH。相应地,网络设备根据N个PRG接收来自终端设备的PUSCH。Step 605, the terminal device sends the PUSCH according to the N PRGs. Correspondingly, the network device receives the PUSCH from the terminal device according to the N PRGs.
此处,终端设备可在确定出的每个PRG上,采用对应的波束赋形方式,向网络设备发送PUSCH。应理解,在一个PRG上发送PUSCH和DMRS采用的波束赋形方式是相同的。Here, the terminal device may send the PUSCH to the network device using a corresponding beamforming manner on each PRG determined. It should be understood that the beamforming manners used for transmitting PUSCH and DMRS on one PRG are the same.
通过上述步骤601至步骤605可以看出,PUSCH的调度带宽对应的N个PRG是根据SRS资源的跳频带宽和第二信息指示的SRS资源的索引确定的,如此,可以使得确定出的PRG较为准确,从而可在DCI开销不增加的前提下,确保每个PRG的波束赋形方式尽可能是最优的,从而可提升PUSCH的传输性能。It can be seen from the above steps 601 to 605 that the N PRGs corresponding to the scheduling bandwidth of the PUSCH are determined according to the frequency hopping bandwidth of the SRS resources and the index of the SRS resources indicated by the second information. In this way, the determined PRGs can be relatively This ensures that the beamforming mode of each PRG is as optimal as possible without increasing the DCI overhead, thereby improving the transmission performance of the PUSCH.
在上述步骤603中,终端设备可根据所述第一信息和所述第二信息,确定PUSCH的调度带宽对应的N个PRG。如下,示例性地的示出了终端设备确定PUSCH的调度带宽对应的N个PRG的可能的实现方式。In the foregoing step 603, the terminal device may determine N PRGs corresponding to the scheduling bandwidth of the PUSCH according to the first information and the second information. The following exemplarily shows a possible implementation manner in which the terminal device determines N PRGs corresponding to the scheduling bandwidth of the PUSCH.
在一种可能的实现方式中,当所述PUSCH的传输层数等于L,所述第二指示信息指示的所述SRS资源的数量为H,所述PUSCH的调度带宽对应的SRS资源的跳频带宽的数 量(或次数)为K,所述N满足N=H×K/L,所述H、K和L均为正整数。其中,PUSCH的传输层数L可以是终端设备根据网络设备发送的第二信息确定的,也可以是根据其它信息确定,或者是协议预先约定的。示例性地,协议预先约定:当第二信息指示的SRS资源数量小于4时,PUSCH的传输层数L均等于1,当第二信息指示的SRS资源数量等于4时,PUSCH的传输层数L等于2。例如下表7中所示,SRI字段指示值为14时,PUSCH的传输层数L=2,否则L=1。或者,协议预先约定:当前PUSCH的传输层数为1。终端设备根据网络设备发送的第二信息确定的PUSCH的传输层数L具体可以是:第二信息额外指示PUSCH的传输层数,例如表8所示,每个SRI字段指示值除了指示选择的SRS资源数量,还指示PUSCH的传输层数,例如当SRI字段指示值为4,网络设备选择了SRS资源0和1,同时指示了L=1,此时,SRS资源0和SRS资源1分别对应了同一个SRS资源的跳频带宽对应的两个PRG,当SRI字段指示值为7,网络设备选择了SRS资源0和1,同时指示了L=2,此时,SRS资源0和SRS资源1分别对应了同一个SRS资源的跳频带宽对应的两个PUSCH的传输层。In a possible implementation manner, when the number of transmission layers of the PUSCH is equal to L, the number of the SRS resources indicated by the second indication information is H, and the frequency hopping of the SRS resources corresponding to the scheduling bandwidth of the PUSCH The number (or times) of the bandwidth is K, the N satisfies N=H×K/L, and the H, K and L are all positive integers. The number L of transmission layers of the PUSCH may be determined by the terminal device according to the second information sent by the network device, or may be determined according to other information, or pre-agreed by a protocol. Exemplarily, the protocol pre-agrees: when the number of SRS resources indicated by the second information is less than 4, the number of transmission layers L of PUSCH is equal to 1, and when the number of SRS resources indicated by the second information is equal to 4, the number of transmission layers of PUSCH L is equal to 2. For example, as shown in Table 7 below, when the indicated value of the SRI field is 14, the number of transmission layers of the PUSCH is L=2, otherwise L=1. Alternatively, the protocol pre-stipulates that the number of transmission layers of the current PUSCH is 1. The number of transmission layers L of the PUSCH determined by the terminal device according to the second information sent by the network device may specifically be: the second information additionally indicates the number of transmission layers of the PUSCH. The number of resources also indicates the number of transmission layers of the PUSCH. For example, when the SRI field indicates a value of 4, the network device selects SRS resources 0 and 1, and indicates L=1. At this time, SRS resource 0 and SRS resource 1 correspond to For two PRGs corresponding to the frequency hopping bandwidth of the same SRS resource, when the SRI field indicates a value of 7, the network device selects SRS resources 0 and 1, and indicates L=2. At this time, SRS resource 0 and SRS resource 1 are respectively Corresponding to the transmission layers of two PUSCHs corresponding to the frequency hopping bandwidth of the same SRS resource.
在一种可能的实现方式中,SRS资源的跳频带宽内的每个PRB上均发送SRS,或者,SRS资源的跳频带宽内仅有部分PRB上发送SRS,其余PRB上未发送SRS,SRS实际占用的带宽可称为实际跳频带宽,可参阅图8。当实际跳频带宽小于SRS资源的跳频带宽时,在PUSCH包括的N个PRG中任意一个PRG上发送PUSCH的波束赋形方式为:发送第一SRS的波束赋形方式,其中,第一SRS占用该PRG对应的SRS资源的跳频带宽中的实际跳频带宽。如此,有助于节省SRS资源开销,并提高SRS的接收质量。In a possible implementation manner, the SRS is sent on each PRB within the frequency hopping bandwidth of the SRS resource, or, within the frequency hopping bandwidth of the SRS resource, the SRS is only sent on some PRBs, and the SRS is not sent on the remaining PRBs. The actual occupied bandwidth can be called the actual frequency hopping bandwidth, see Figure 8. When the actual frequency hopping bandwidth is smaller than the frequency hopping bandwidth of the SRS resource, the beamforming mode for sending the PUSCH on any one of the N PRGs included in the PUSCH is: the beamforming mode for sending the first SRS, where the first SRS The actual frequency hopping bandwidth in the frequency hopping bandwidth of the SRS resource corresponding to the PRG is occupied. In this way, it is helpful to save the SRS resource overhead and improve the reception quality of the SRS.
需要说明的是,网络设备可以通过RRC信令配置一个门限值。终端设备根据门限值和SRS资源的跳频带宽的大小关系确定PUSCH的PRG。具体的,当SRS资源的跳频带宽大于门限值时,PUSCH的PRG根据确定方式可参见上述实施例的介绍,这里不再赘述。当SRS资源的跳频带宽小于门限值时,PUSCH的PRG可仅根据PUSCH的调度带宽对应的SRS资源的跳频带宽数量确定,此时,SRI字段指示的SRS资源的数量不再用于确定PRG,而是用来指示PUSCH的传输层数,例如,SRI字段指示的SRS资源的数量等于PUSCH的传输层数。也就是说,当SRS资源的跳频带宽较小时(例如仅有4个PRB),此时由于PUSCH的PRG仅根据PUSCH的调度带宽对应的SRS资源的跳频带宽确定,PRG也会较小,可以满足波束赋形方式指示的精度;当SRS资源的跳频带宽较大时,若仅基于PUSCH的调度带宽对应的SRS资源的跳频带宽确定PRG,会导致较大的PRG无法满足波束赋形方式指示的精度,从而需要进一步根据SRI指示的SRS资源数量进一步划分PRG,以获得较为精细的波束赋形方式指示精度。应理解,上述门限值可以是一个参数值,可以是根据调频带宽和参数值的关系确定PUSCH的PRG。It should be noted that the network device may configure a threshold value through RRC signaling. The terminal device determines the PRG of the PUSCH according to the relationship between the threshold value and the frequency hopping bandwidth of the SRS resource. Specifically, when the frequency hopping bandwidth of the SRS resource is greater than the threshold value, the PRG of the PUSCH may be determined according to the description of the above embodiment, and details are not repeated here. When the frequency hopping bandwidth of the SRS resource is less than the threshold value, the PRG of the PUSCH can be determined only according to the number of frequency hopping bandwidths of the SRS resource corresponding to the scheduling bandwidth of the PUSCH. At this time, the number of SRS resources indicated by the SRI field is no longer used for determination. PRG is used to indicate the number of transmission layers of PUSCH. For example, the number of SRS resources indicated by the SRI field is equal to the number of transmission layers of PUSCH. That is to say, when the frequency hopping bandwidth of the SRS resource is small (for example, there are only 4 PRBs), at this time, since the PRG of the PUSCH is only determined according to the frequency hopping bandwidth of the SRS resource corresponding to the scheduling bandwidth of the PUSCH, the PRG will also be small. The accuracy indicated by the beamforming method can be met; when the frequency hopping bandwidth of the SRS resource is large, if the PRG is determined only based on the frequency hopping bandwidth of the SRS resource corresponding to the scheduling bandwidth of the PUSCH, the larger PRG will not be able to satisfy the beamforming. Therefore, it is necessary to further divide the PRG according to the number of SRS resources indicated by the SRI, so as to obtain a relatively finer beamforming mode indication accuracy. It should be understood that the above-mentioned threshold value may be a parameter value, and may be the PRG of the PUSCH determined according to the relationship between the frequency modulation bandwidth and the parameter value.
表7可以选择的SRS资源的最大数量为4时SRI字段指示值含义Table 7 Meaning of the SRI field indication value when the maximum number of SRS resources that can be selected is 4
Figure PCTCN2021112454-appb-000011
Figure PCTCN2021112454-appb-000011
Figure PCTCN2021112454-appb-000012
Figure PCTCN2021112454-appb-000012
表8可以选择的SRS资源的最大数量为4时SRI字段指示值含义Table 8 Meaning of the SRI field indication value when the maximum number of SRS resources that can be selected is 4
Figure PCTCN2021112454-appb-000013
Figure PCTCN2021112454-appb-000013
Figure PCTCN2021112454-appb-000014
Figure PCTCN2021112454-appb-000014
应理解,若协议预先约定SRI字段指示的每个SRS资源各自对应一个不同的PUSCH传输层,则N=K,此时,每个PUSCH的PRG分别对应一个不同的SRS资源的跳频带宽;若协议预先约定PUSCH的传输层数=1,则当SRI字段指示了两个SRS资源,两个SRS资源均对应同一个PUSCH的传输层,则N=2K。It should be understood that if the protocol pre-agrees that each SRS resource indicated by the SRI field corresponds to a different PUSCH transmission layer, then N=K, at this time, the PRG of each PUSCH corresponds to a different frequency hopping bandwidth of the SRS resource; if The protocol pre-agrees that the number of PUSCH transmission layers=1, then when the SRI field indicates two SRS resources, and the two SRS resources both correspond to the same PUSCH transmission layer, then N=2K.
参阅上述图7b,以指示的一个SRS资源对应一个PUSCH的传输层为例(即L=1),PUSCH4的调度带宽与SRS资源的一个跳频带宽重叠,即PUSCH4的调度带宽内包括的SRS资源的跳频带宽的数量为1,则K=1;SRI字段指示值=0&1,则H=2;因此,PUSCH3的调度带宽包括的PRG的数量N=H×K/L=2×1/1=2。PUSCH3的调度带宽与SRS资源的两个跳频带宽重叠,即PUSCH3的调度带宽内包括的SRS资源的跳频带宽的数量为2,则K=2,SRI字段指示值=0,则H=1;因此,PUSCH3的调度带宽包括的PRG的数量N=H×K/L=2×2/1=2。Referring to the above-mentioned FIG. 7 b, taking the indicated SRS resource corresponding to the transmission layer of one PUSCH as an example (i.e. L=1), the scheduling bandwidth of PUSCH4 overlaps with a frequency hopping bandwidth of the SRS resource, that is, the SRS resource included in the scheduling bandwidth of PUSCH4 The number of frequency hopping bandwidths of PUSCH3 is 1, then K=1; the SRI field indication value=0&1, then H=2; therefore, the number of PRGs included in the scheduling bandwidth of PUSCH3 N=H×K/L=2×1/1 = 2. The scheduling bandwidth of PUSCH3 overlaps with the two frequency hopping bandwidths of the SRS resources, that is, the number of frequency hopping bandwidths of the SRS resources included in the scheduling bandwidth of PUSCH3 is 2, then K=2, and the SRI field indication value=0, then H=1 ; Therefore, the number of PRGs included in the scheduling bandwidth of PUSCH3 is N=H×K/L=2×2/1=2.
结合上述图7a,以指示的一个SRS资源对应一个PUSCH的传输层为例(即L=1),PUSCH的调度带宽包括PRB0、PRB1、PRB2、PRB3、PRB4、PRB5、PRB6和PRB7,PUSCH的调度带宽内包括的SRS资源的跳频带宽的数量为2,则K=2,SRI字段指示值=0&1,则H=2,PUSCH的调度带宽包括的PRG的数量N=H×K/L=2×2/1=4。With reference to the above Figure 7a, taking the indicated SRS resource corresponding to the transmission layer of one PUSCH as an example (ie L=1), the scheduling bandwidth of PUSCH includes PRB0, PRB1, PRB2, PRB3, PRB4, PRB5, PRB6 and PRB7. The scheduling of PUSCH The number of frequency hopping bandwidths of the SRS resources included in the bandwidth is 2, then K=2, the SRI field indication value=0&1, then H=2, the number of PRGs included in the PUSCH scheduling bandwidth N=H×K/L=2 ×2/1=4.
进一步,可选地,终端设备还需要确定PUSCH的调度带宽对应N个PRG中的每个PRG所包括的PRB的起始位置和终止位置。如下示例性地的示出两种可能的实现方式。Further, optionally, the terminal device also needs to determine the starting position and ending position of the PRB included in each PRG in the N PRGs corresponding to the scheduling bandwidth of the PUSCH. Two possible implementations are shown exemplarily as follows.
实现方式一,先根据SRS资源的跳频带宽确定PRG集合,再根据第二信息指示的SRS资源的数量H划分每个PRG集合。Implementation manner 1: First determine the PRG set according to the frequency hopping bandwidth of the SRS resources, and then divide each PRG set according to the number H of SRS resources indicated by the second information.
在一种可能的实现方式中,假设PUSCH的调度带宽包括PRB 0,PRB 1, ,PRB m,按照一定频率顺序依次排列。终端设备可从PUSCH的调度带宽包括的第一个PRB 0起依次判断当前PRB是否满足限定条件:PRB i-1和PRB i分别对应不同的SRS资源的跳频带宽。当PRB i-1满足该限定条件时,将PRB 0到PRB i-1作为第一个PRG集合,即第一个PRG集合包括{PRB 0,PRB 1,…,PRB i-1};进一步的,从PRB i起,依次判断当前PRB是否满足限定条件,当PRB k-1满足该限定条件时,PRB i到PRB k-1为第二个PRG集合,即第二个PRG集合={PRB i,PRB i+1,…,PRB k-1};依次类推,直至判断完PRB m为止。其中,第一个PRG集合中的最后一个PRB i-1与第二个PRG集合中的第一个PRB i对应的SRS资源的不同跳频带宽,即第一个PRG集合中的最后一个PRB i-1为第一PRB,第二个PRG集合中的第一个PRB i为第二PRB。也就是说,从PUSCH的调度带宽包括的第一个PRB 0起,依次遍历PUSCH的调度带宽包括的PRB,在出现相邻两个PRB对应SRS资源的不同跳频带宽时,可将前面的PRB划分为一个PRG集合,继续遍历PRB,直至最后一个PRB m为止。 In a possible implementation, it is assumed that the scheduling bandwidth of the PUSCH includes PRB 0 , PRB 1 , . . . , PRB m , which are sequentially arranged in a certain frequency order. The terminal device can sequentially determine whether the current PRB meets the limited conditions from the first PRB 0 included in the scheduling bandwidth of the PUSCH: PRB i-1 and PRB i respectively correspond to frequency hopping bandwidths of different SRS resources. When PRB i-1 satisfies this restriction, take PRB 0 to PRB i-1 as the first PRG set, that is, the first PRG set includes {PRB 0 , PRB 1 ,..., PRB i-1 }; further , starting from PRB i , judge whether the current PRB satisfies the restriction condition in turn. When PRB k-1 satisfies the restriction condition, PRB i to PRB k-1 are the second PRG set, that is, the second PRG set={PRB i ,PRB i+1 ,...,PRB k-1 }; and so on, until PRB m is judged. The different frequency hopping bandwidths of the SRS resources corresponding to the last PRB i-1 in the first PRG set and the first PRB i in the second PRG set, that is, the last PRB i in the first PRG set -1 is the first PRB, and the first PRB i in the second PRG set is the second PRB. That is to say, starting from the first PRB 0 included in the scheduling bandwidth of PUSCH, the PRBs included in the scheduling bandwidth of PUSCH are traversed in turn. Divide into a PRG set, and continue to traverse the PRBs until the last PRB m .
进一步,可选地,针对每个PRG集合,再根据H划分每个PRG集合,即终端设备可确定每个PRG包括的PRB的起始位置和终止位置。在一种可能的实现方式中,每个PRG 集合中包括a个PRB,则每个PRG集合中的前
Figure PCTCN2021112454-appb-000015
个PRB属于第一个PRG,与前
Figure PCTCN2021112454-appb-000016
个PRB紧邻的
Figure PCTCN2021112454-appb-000017
个PRB属于第二个PRG,依次类推;或者,每个PRG集合中的前
Figure PCTCN2021112454-appb-000018
个PRB属于第一个PRG,与前
Figure PCTCN2021112454-appb-000019
个PRB紧邻的
Figure PCTCN2021112454-appb-000020
个PRB为第二个PRG,依次类推,其中,
Figure PCTCN2021112454-appb-000021
表示向上取整,
Figure PCTCN2021112454-appb-000022
表示向下取整。
Further, optionally, for each PRG set, each PRG set is further divided according to H, that is, the terminal device can determine the starting position and the ending position of the PRB included in each PRG. In a possible implementation, each PRG set includes a PRBs, then the first PRGs in each PRG set are
Figure PCTCN2021112454-appb-000015
PRBs belong to the first PRG, the same as the previous
Figure PCTCN2021112454-appb-000016
PRBs next to each other
Figure PCTCN2021112454-appb-000017
PRBs belong to the second PRG, and so on; or, the first PRG in each PRG set
Figure PCTCN2021112454-appb-000018
PRBs belong to the first PRG, the same as the previous
Figure PCTCN2021112454-appb-000019
PRBs next to each other
Figure PCTCN2021112454-appb-000020
PRB is the second PRG, and so on, where,
Figure PCTCN2021112454-appb-000021
means round up,
Figure PCTCN2021112454-appb-000022
Indicates rounded down.
结合上述图7a,从第一个PRB 0起,依次遍历至PRB 3时,可以确定PRB 3和PRB 4对应SRS资源的不同跳频带宽,因此可将PRB 0至PRB 3确定为第一个PRG集合;依次类推,可将PRB 4至PRB 7确定为第二个PRG集合。进一步,可选地,H=2,针对第一个PRG集合,可将前4/2=2个PRB确定为第一个PRG,即PRG0包括PRB 0和PRB 1,将后2个PRB确定为第二个PRG,即PRG1包括PRB 2和PRB 3。针对第二个PRG集合,可将前4/2=2个PRB确定为第三个PRG,即PRG2包括PRB 4和PRB 5,将后2个PRB确定为第四个PRG,即PRG3包括PRB 6和PRB 77a, when traversing from the first PRB 0 to PRB 3 in sequence, the different frequency hopping bandwidths of the SRS resources corresponding to PRB 3 and PRB 4 can be determined, so PRB 0 to PRB 3 can be determined as the first PRG Set; and so on, PRB 4 to PRB 7 can be determined as the second set of PRGs. Further, optionally, H=2, for the first PRG set, the first 4/2=2 PRBs may be determined as the first PRG, that is, PRG0 includes PRB 0 and PRB 1 , and the last two PRBs are determined as The second PRG, PRG1, includes PRB2 and PRB3 . For the second set of PRGs, the first 4/2=2 PRBs can be determined as the third PRG, that is, PRG2 includes PRB 4 and PRB 5 , and the last 2 PRBs are determined as the fourth PRG, that is, PRG3 includes PRB 6 and PRB 7 .
实现方式二,直接确定每个PRG包括的PRB的起始位置和终止位置。In the second implementation, the start position and the end position of the PRB included in each PRG are directly determined.
在一种可能的实现方式中,从PUSCH的调度带宽包括的第一个PRB 0起,依次累计到
Figure PCTCN2021112454-appb-000023
为止,则
Figure PCTCN2021112454-appb-000024
为第一个PRG;
Figure PCTCN2021112454-appb-000025
为第二个PRG,其中,
Figure PCTCN2021112454-appb-000026
Figure PCTCN2021112454-appb-000027
对应SRS资源的不同跳频带宽,依次类推,直至PRB m为止,可以确定出PUSCH的调度带宽对应的N个PRG。或者,从PUSCH的调度带宽的第一个PRB 0起,依次累计到
Figure PCTCN2021112454-appb-000028
为止,则
Figure PCTCN2021112454-appb-000029
为第一个PRG;
Figure PCTCN2021112454-appb-000030
为第二个PRG,依次类推,直到PRB m为止,其中,
Figure PCTCN2021112454-appb-000031
Figure PCTCN2021112454-appb-000032
对应SRS资源的不同跳频带宽。
In a possible implementation manner, starting from the first PRB 0 included in the scheduling bandwidth of the PUSCH, the
Figure PCTCN2021112454-appb-000023
so far, then
Figure PCTCN2021112454-appb-000024
is the first PRG;
Figure PCTCN2021112454-appb-000025
is the second PRG, where,
Figure PCTCN2021112454-appb-000026
and
Figure PCTCN2021112454-appb-000027
Corresponding to different frequency hopping bandwidths of the SRS resources, and so on, until PRB m , N PRGs corresponding to the scheduling bandwidth of the PUSCH can be determined. Or, starting from the first PRB 0 of the scheduling bandwidth of PUSCH, accumulate to
Figure PCTCN2021112454-appb-000028
so far, then
Figure PCTCN2021112454-appb-000029
is the first PRG;
Figure PCTCN2021112454-appb-000030
is the second PRG, and so on, until PRB m , where,
Figure PCTCN2021112454-appb-000031
and
Figure PCTCN2021112454-appb-000032
Corresponds to different frequency hopping bandwidths of SRS resources.
需要说明的是,PRB的上角标表示PRG编号,下角标表示PRB在PUSCH的调度带宽内的编号。例如,
Figure PCTCN2021112454-appb-000033
的上角标0表示第一个PRG,下角标0表示在PUSCH的调度带宽内的第一个PRB。
It should be noted that the superscript of the PRB represents the PRG number, and the subscript represents the number of the PRB within the scheduling bandwidth of the PUSCH. E.g,
Figure PCTCN2021112454-appb-000033
The superscript 0 indicates the first PRG, and the subscript 0 indicates the first PRB within the scheduling bandwidth of the PUSCH.
通过上述两种实现方式,终端设备确定出的PUSCH对应的N个PRG中的每个PRG仅对应一个SRS资源的跳频带宽,且每个PRG包括编号连续的
Figure PCTCN2021112454-appb-000034
或者
Figure PCTCN2021112454-appb-000035
个PRB,N hopping为SRS资源的一次跳频带宽包括的PRB的数量,H表示SRI字段指示的对应1个PUSCH传输层的SRS资源数量。
Through the above two implementation manners, each PRG in the N PRGs corresponding to the PUSCH determined by the terminal device only corresponds to the frequency hopping bandwidth of one SRS resource, and each PRG includes consecutively numbered frequency hopping bandwidths.
Figure PCTCN2021112454-appb-000034
or
Figure PCTCN2021112454-appb-000035
number of PRBs, N hopping is the number of PRBs included in one frequency hopping bandwidth of the SRS resource, and H represents the number of SRS resources corresponding to one PUSCH transmission layer indicated by the SRI field.
需要说明的是,基于上述实现方式一和实现方式二划分出的PRG集合中的每个集合中包括PRB的数量不一定是相同的,上述仅是为了便于方案的说明,以每个PRG集合中包括的PRB的数量是相同的进行示例的。It should be noted that the number of PRBs included in each of the PRG sets divided based on the first and second implementations above is not necessarily the same. The above is only for the convenience of the solution description. The number of PRBs included is the same for the example.
本申请中,在调度PUSCH的DCI(用于承载第二信息)信令下发之前,某些SRS资源的跳频带宽上可能还未发送SRS。这是由于网络设备配置的SRS资源的跳频带宽较小且系统带宽较大时,在一个SRS发送周期内仅完成一部分系统带宽的探测,其余部分带宽的探测留至后续(如下一个)SRS周期探测。或者,也可能是由于配置的SRS资源的探测带 宽仅为系统带宽的一部分,即PUSCH可能调度在探测带宽之外,例如,PUSCH占用系统带宽内第1-10个PRB,而SRS的探测带宽占用第5-20个PRB。对于这类情况,未对应SRS探测带宽的PUSCH的PRB,或者说,未对应任何SRS资源的跳频带宽的PUSCH的PRB上采用的波束赋形方式为:PUSCH中的第六PRB对应的波束赋形方式;第六PRB为对应了SRS的跳频带宽、且与未对应任何SRS资源的跳频带宽的PUSCH的PRB相邻。例如,PUSCH占用的第5-10个PRB对应了SRS的探测带宽,而第1-4个PRB未对应SRS的探测带宽,则PUSCH占用的第1-4个PRB采用的波束赋形方式与第5个PRB采用相同的波束赋形方式。这样,可以避免PUSCH占用的某些PRB上无法确定波束赋形方式,同时,考虑到信道的频域相关性,未对应SRS资源的跳频带宽的PUSCH占用的PRB的波束赋形方式参考临近的PUSCH的PRB可以提高未对应SRS资源的跳频带宽的PUSCH占用的PRB的波束赋形方式的性能。In this application, before the signaling of the DCI (used to carry the second information) for scheduling the PUSCH is issued, the SRS may not be sent on the frequency hopping bandwidth of some SRS resources. This is because when the frequency hopping bandwidth of the SRS resource configured by the network device is small and the system bandwidth is large, only a part of the system bandwidth detection is completed in one SRS transmission cycle, and the detection of the remaining part of the bandwidth is reserved for the subsequent (next) SRS cycle. probe. Alternatively, it may also be because the sounding bandwidth of the configured SRS resource is only a part of the system bandwidth, that is, the PUSCH may be scheduled outside the sounding bandwidth. For example, the PUSCH occupies the 1st to 10th PRBs in the system bandwidth, while the sounding bandwidth of the SRS occupies 5th-20th PRB. For such cases, the beamforming method adopted on the PRB of the PUSCH that does not correspond to the SRS sounding bandwidth, or the PRB of the PUSCH that does not correspond to the frequency hopping bandwidth of any SRS resource is: the beamforming method corresponding to the sixth PRB in the PUSCH The sixth PRB is the PRB of the PUSCH corresponding to the frequency hopping bandwidth of the SRS and adjacent to the PUSCH that does not correspond to the frequency hopping bandwidth of any SRS resource. For example, the 5th to 10th PRBs occupied by PUSCH correspond to the sounding bandwidth of SRS, while the 1st to 4th PRBs do not correspond to the sounding bandwidth of SRS, then the beamforming method adopted by the 1st to 4th PRBs occupied by PUSCH is the same as that of the 1st to 4th PRBs occupied by PUSCH. The 5 PRBs use the same beamforming method. In this way, it can be avoided that the beamforming mode cannot be determined on some PRBs occupied by the PUSCH. At the same time, considering the frequency domain correlation of the channel, the beamforming mode of the PRB occupied by the PUSCH that does not correspond to the frequency hopping bandwidth of the SRS resource is referred to the adjacent The PRB of the PUSCH can improve the performance of the beamforming mode of the PRB occupied by the PUSCH that does not correspond to the frequency hopping bandwidth of the SRS resource.
在一种可能的实现方式中,SRS资源的跳频带宽内的每个PRB上均发送SRS,或者,SRS资源的跳频带宽内仅有部分PRB上发送SRS,其余PRB上未发送SRS,SRS实际占用的带宽可称为实际跳频带宽,可参阅图8。当实际跳频带宽小于SRS资源的跳频带宽时,在PUSCH包括的N个PRG中任意一个PRG上发送PUSCH的波束赋形方式为:发送第一SRS的波束赋形方式,其中,第一SRS占用该PRG对应的SRS资源的跳频带宽中的实际跳频带宽。如此,有助于节省SRS资源开销,并提高SRS的接收质量。In a possible implementation manner, the SRS is sent on each PRB within the frequency hopping bandwidth of the SRS resource, or, within the frequency hopping bandwidth of the SRS resource, the SRS is only sent on some PRBs, and the SRS is not sent on the remaining PRBs. The actual occupied bandwidth can be called the actual frequency hopping bandwidth, see Figure 8. When the actual frequency hopping bandwidth is smaller than the frequency hopping bandwidth of the SRS resource, the beamforming mode for sending the PUSCH on any one of the N PRGs included in the PUSCH is: the beamforming mode for sending the first SRS, where the first SRS The actual frequency hopping bandwidth in the frequency hopping bandwidth of the SRS resource corresponding to the PRG is occupied. In this way, it is helpful to save the SRS resource overhead and improve the reception quality of the SRS.
需要说明的是,网络设备可以通过RRC信令配置一个门限值。终端设备根据门限值和SRS资源的跳频带宽的大小关系确定PUSCH的PRG。具体的,当SRS资源的跳频带宽大于门限值时,PUSCH的PRG根据确定方式可参见上述实施例的介绍,这里不再赘述。当SRS资源的跳频带宽小于门限值时,PUSCH的PRG可仅根据PUSCH的调度带宽对应的SRS资源的跳频带宽数量确定,此时,SRI字段指示的SRS资源的数量不再用于确定PRG,而是用来指示PUSCH的传输层数,例如,SRI字段指示的SRS资源的数量等于PUSCH的传输层数。也就是说,当SRS资源的跳频带宽较小时(例如仅有4个PRB),此时由于PUSCH的PRG仅根据PUSCH的调度带宽对应的SRS资源的跳频带宽确定,PRG也会较小,可以满足波束赋形方式指示的精度;当SRS资源的跳频带宽较大时,若仅基于PUSCH的调度带宽对应的SRS资源的跳频带宽确定PRG,会导致较大的PRG无法满足波束赋形方式指示的精度,从而需要进一步根据SRI指示的SRS资源数量进一步划分PRG,以获得较为精细的波束赋形方式指示精度。It should be noted that the network device may configure a threshold value through RRC signaling. The terminal device determines the PRG of the PUSCH according to the relationship between the threshold value and the frequency hopping bandwidth of the SRS resource. Specifically, when the frequency hopping bandwidth of the SRS resource is greater than the threshold value, the PRG of the PUSCH may be determined according to the description of the above embodiment, and details are not repeated here. When the frequency hopping bandwidth of the SRS resource is less than the threshold value, the PRG of the PUSCH can be determined only according to the number of frequency hopping bandwidths of the SRS resource corresponding to the scheduling bandwidth of the PUSCH. At this time, the number of SRS resources indicated by the SRI field is no longer used for determination. PRG is used to indicate the number of transmission layers of PUSCH. For example, the number of SRS resources indicated by the SRI field is equal to the number of transmission layers of PUSCH. That is to say, when the frequency hopping bandwidth of the SRS resource is small (for example, there are only 4 PRBs), at this time, since the PRG of the PUSCH is only determined according to the frequency hopping bandwidth of the SRS resource corresponding to the scheduling bandwidth of the PUSCH, the PRG will also be small. The accuracy indicated by the beamforming method can be met; when the frequency hopping bandwidth of the SRS resource is large, if the PRG is determined only based on the frequency hopping bandwidth of the SRS resource corresponding to the scheduling bandwidth of the PUSCH, the larger PRG will not be able to satisfy the beamforming. Therefore, it is necessary to further divide the PRG according to the number of SRS resources indicated by the SRI, so as to obtain a relatively finer beamforming mode indication accuracy.
本申请中,PUSCH的调度带宽也可以配置为跳频模式。如图9所示的PUSCH由一个DCI信令调度,也可以认为,该PUSCH承载了同一个传输块。PUSCH可占用多个时间单元(每个时间单元可以包括多个连续的OFDM符号),每个时间单元对应PUSCH的同一跳频带宽,即每个时间单元对应一次跳频(hop),位于该一个时间单元内不同OFDM符号上的PUSCH均占用相同的带宽,位于不同时间单元内的PUSCH占用不同的带宽。In this application, the scheduling bandwidth of the PUSCH may also be configured in a frequency hopping mode. As shown in FIG. 9 , the PUSCH is scheduled by one DCI signaling, and it can also be considered that the PUSCH carries the same transport block. PUSCH may occupy multiple time units (each time unit may include multiple consecutive OFDM symbols), and each time unit corresponds to the same frequency hopping bandwidth of PUSCH, that is, each time unit corresponds to one frequency hopping (hop), which is located in the one PUSCHs on different OFDM symbols in a time unit all occupy the same bandwidth, and PUSCHs located in different time units occupy different bandwidths.
一种网络设备调度PUSCH采用跳频模式的方式为:网络设备下发的DCI用于指示第一次PUSCH跳频所占的PRB位置和数量,其余的PUSCH跳频占用的PRB位置和数量根据预先配置的偏移量确定,例如,DCI指示第一次PUSCH跳频占用PRB0-PRB10,且预先配置的偏移量为50,则第二次PUSCH跳频占用PRB50-PRB60。在该PUSCH的跳频模式下,不同PUSCH的跳频带宽可以对应不同的SRS资源的跳频带宽,例如图9中,hop1 对应SRS资源在符号4的跳频带宽,hop2对应SRS资源在符号2的跳频带宽。应理解,每次hop内均包括至少一个OFDM符号用于承载解调参考信号(demodulation reference signal,DMRS)。A method in which a network device schedules PUSCH in a frequency hopping mode is as follows: the DCI issued by the network device is used to indicate the PRB position and quantity occupied by the first PUSCH frequency hopping, and the PRB positions and quantity occupied by the remaining PUSCH frequency hopping are based on the pre- The configured offset is determined. For example, if the DCI indicates that the first PUSCH frequency hopping occupies PRB0-PRB10, and the pre-configured offset is 50, then the second PUSCH frequency hopping occupies PRB50-PRB60. In the frequency hopping mode of the PUSCH, the frequency hopping bandwidths of different PUSCHs may correspond to the frequency hopping bandwidths of different SRS resources. For example, in FIG. 9 , hop1 corresponds to the frequency hopping bandwidth of SRS resources in symbol 4, and hop2 corresponds to SRS resources in symbol 2. hopping bandwidth. It should be understood that each hop includes at least one OFDM symbol for carrying a demodulation reference signal (demodulation reference signal, DMRS).
在一种可能的实现方式中,终端设备可根据PUSCH的跳频带宽和相对应的SRS资源的跳频带宽共同确定PUSCH的调度带宽包括的PRG。示例性的,终端设备先根据PUSCH的跳频带宽将PUSCH的调度带宽划分成多个PRG集合,每一次PUSCH的跳频带宽对应一个PRG集合。在每个PRG集合上,终端设备再根据SRS资源的跳频带宽确定PRG,即:每个PUSCH的跳频上,分别独立采用本申请方案确定PRG。In a possible implementation manner, the terminal device may jointly determine the PRG included in the scheduling bandwidth of the PUSCH according to the frequency hopping bandwidth of the PUSCH and the corresponding frequency hopping bandwidth of the SRS resource. Exemplarily, the terminal device first divides the scheduling bandwidth of the PUSCH into multiple PRG sets according to the frequency hopping bandwidth of the PUSCH, and each frequency hopping bandwidth of the PUSCH corresponds to one PRG set. On each PRG set, the terminal device then determines the PRG according to the frequency hopping bandwidth of the SRS resource, that is, on the frequency hopping of each PUSCH, the solution of the present application is used to determine the PRG independently.
在一种可能的实现方式中,一次PUSCH调度中,不同PUSCH的跳频上可以承载同一个传输块(transmission block,TB)的不同信息比特。具体的,终端设备根据调度信息对数据比特做信道编码、调制和层映射操作形成编码调制后的数据符号,将数据符号按照先频域后时域的顺序映射到物理资源上,其中,物理资源包括不同的PUSCH跳频。这种方式可以理解为,将编码调制后的数据符号统一映射在多次跳频资源上。In a possible implementation manner, in one PUSCH scheduling, different information bits of the same transmission block (transmission block, TB) may be carried on the frequency hopping of different PUSCHs. Specifically, the terminal device performs channel coding, modulation and layer mapping operations on the data bits according to the scheduling information to form coded and modulated data symbols, and maps the data symbols to the physical resources in the order of the frequency domain first and then the time domain. Including different PUSCH frequency hopping. In this way, it can be understood that the coded and modulated data symbols are uniformly mapped on multiple frequency hopping resources.
在另一种可能的实现方式中,不同PUSCH的跳频上承载同一个TB的所有信息比特,也就是说,不同PUSCH的跳频上重复传输相同的TB。具体的,终端设备根据调度信息对数据比特做信道编码、调制和层映射操作形成编码调制后的数据符号,将数据符号按照先频域后时域的顺序重复映射到每一次PUSCH跳频资源上。这种方式可以理解为,将编码调制后的数据符号分别重复映射在多次跳频资源上。In another possible implementation manner, the frequency hopping of different PUSCH carries all the information bits of the same TB, that is, the same TB is repeatedly transmitted on the frequency hopping of different PUSCH. Specifically, the terminal device performs channel coding, modulation, and layer mapping operations on the data bits according to the scheduling information to form coded and modulated data symbols, and repeatedly maps the data symbols to each PUSCH frequency hopping resource in the order of frequency domain first and then time domain. . In this way, it can be understood that the coded and modulated data symbols are repeatedly mapped on the frequency hopping resources for multiple times.
如图10所示,为本申请提供的另一种通信方法的方法流程示意图。该方法中以PUSCH的调度带宽被配置为调频模式为例进行说明。该方法包括以下步骤:As shown in FIG. 10 , it is a schematic flowchart of another communication method provided by the present application. In this method, the scheduling bandwidth of the PUSCH is configured as a frequency modulation mode as an example for description. The method includes the following steps:
步骤1001,网络设备确定第三信息。Step 1001, the network device determines third information.
此处,所述第三信息用于指示PUSCH的跳频带宽和跳频次数。Here, the third information is used to indicate the frequency hopping bandwidth and frequency hopping times of the PUSCH.
在一种可能的实现方式中,网络设备可为终端设备配置PUSCH的跳频带宽。结合上述图9,网络设备可为终端设备配置多个PUSCH跳频带宽,每个跳频带宽对应不同的时域资源和频域资源。其中,第三信息的一种实现方式是:指示第一次PUSCH跳频所占的时频资源,其余PUSCH跳频所占的时频资源根据第一次PUSCH跳频所占的时频资源和预设的偏移量确定。In a possible implementation manner, the network device may configure the frequency hopping bandwidth of the PUSCH for the terminal device. With reference to the above FIG. 9 , the network device may configure multiple PUSCH frequency hopping bandwidths for the terminal device, and each frequency hopping bandwidth corresponds to different time domain resources and frequency domain resources. One implementation of the third information is: indicating the time-frequency resources occupied by the first PUSCH frequency hopping, and the time-frequency resources occupied by the remaining PUSCH frequency hopping according to the time-frequency resources occupied by the first PUSCH frequency hopping and The preset offset is determined.
示例性地,第一次PUSCH跳频所占的时频资源可以通过DCI信令指示,预设的偏移量可以通过RRC信令指示。Exemplarily, the time-frequency resources occupied by the first PUSCH frequency hopping may be indicated by DCI signaling, and the preset offset may be indicated by RRC signaling.
步骤1002,网络设备向终端设备发送第三信息。相应地,终端设备接收来自网络设备的第三信息。Step 1002, the network device sends third information to the terminal device. Accordingly, the terminal device receives the third information from the network device.
步骤1003,终端设备可根据第三信息确定PUSCH的调度带宽对应的M个PRG,所述M为正整数。Step 1003, the terminal device may determine M PRGs corresponding to the scheduling bandwidth of the PUSCH according to the third information, where M is a positive integer.
在一种可能的实现方式中,当PUSCH的调度带宽包括的M个跳频带宽中的每个跳频带宽对应的SRS资源的跳频带宽不同时,M个PRG中每个PRG分别为PUSCH的一个跳频带宽。In a possible implementation manner, when the frequency hopping bandwidths of the SRS resources corresponding to each of the M frequency hopping bandwidths included in the scheduling bandwidth of the PUSCH are different, each PRG in the M PRGs is a A frequency hopping bandwidth.
进一步,可选地,PUSCH一个跳频带宽所占的PRB数量即为该PUSCH的跳频带宽包括的PRB数量。也就是说,PUSCH一个跳频带宽的PRB的位置即为该PUSCH的跳频带宽的PRB的位置。例如,PUSCH的一个跳频带宽占用PRB 0和PRB 1,则该PUSCH的跳频带宽的PRB的起始PRB为PRB 1,终止PRB为PRB 2Further, optionally, the number of PRBs occupied by one frequency hopping bandwidth of the PUSCH is the number of PRBs included in the frequency hopping bandwidth of the PUSCH. That is to say, the position of a PRB of one frequency hopping bandwidth of the PUSCH is the position of the PRB of the frequency hopping bandwidth of the PUSCH. For example, one frequency hopping bandwidth of the PUSCH occupies PRB 0 and PRB 1 , then the starting PRB of the PRB of the frequency hopping bandwidth of the PUSCH is PRB 1 , and the ending PRB is PRB 2 .
当PUSCH的一个跳频带宽对应SRS资源的多个跳频带宽(如图9中的PUSCH的跳频带宽1)时,此处,终端设备需要再根据网络设备指示的SRS资源的跳频带宽进一步确定PRG。也就是说,终端设备可先根据PUSCH的跳频带宽将PUSCH的调度带宽划分成多个PRG集合,结合图9,终端设备可将PUSCH的调度带宽划分成两个PRG集合,针对每个PRG集合,再进一步根据对应的SRS资源的跳频带宽划分出每个PRG,具体过程可参见上述相关介绍,即可将相关描述中PUSCH的调度跳频带宽替换为对应的PUSCH的跳频带宽即可,此处不再重复赘述。例如,根据PUSCH的跳频带宽1对应的SRS资源的跳频带宽划分每个PRG时,可将上述相关描述中的PUSCH的调度跳频带宽替换为PUSCH的跳频带宽1即可。也就是说,终端设备还可接收来自网络设备的第一信息,所述第一信息用于指示SRS资源的跳频带宽。When one frequency hopping bandwidth of PUSCH corresponds to multiple frequency hopping bandwidths of SRS resources (such as frequency hopping bandwidth 1 of PUSCH in FIG. 9 ), here, the terminal device needs to further follow the frequency hopping bandwidth of SRS resources indicated by the network device. Determine the PRG. That is, the terminal device can first divide the scheduling bandwidth of the PUSCH into multiple PRG sets according to the frequency hopping bandwidth of the PUSCH. With reference to FIG. 9 , the terminal device can divide the scheduling bandwidth of the PUSCH into two PRG sets, and for each PRG set , and further divide each PRG according to the frequency hopping bandwidth of the corresponding SRS resource. For the specific process, please refer to the above related introduction, that is, the scheduling frequency hopping bandwidth of the PUSCH in the relevant description can be replaced with the corresponding PUSCH frequency hopping bandwidth. It will not be repeated here. For example, when dividing each PRG according to the frequency hopping bandwidth of the SRS resource corresponding to the frequency hopping bandwidth 1 of the PUSCH, the scheduling frequency hopping bandwidth of the PUSCH in the above related description may be replaced by the frequency hopping bandwidth 1 of the PUSCH. That is, the terminal device may also receive first information from the network device, where the first information is used to indicate the frequency hopping bandwidth of the SRS resource.
进一步,可选地,终端设备可还可根据网络设备指示的SRS资源的跳频带宽和SRS资源的索引确定PRG。也就是说,终端设备可先根据PUSCH的跳频带宽将PUSCH的调度带宽划分成多个PRG集合,结合图9,终端设备可将PUSCH的调度带宽划分成两个PRG集合,针对每个PRG集合,再进一步根据对应的SRS资源的跳频带宽和SRI字段指示的SRS资源划分出每个PRG,具体过程可参见上述相关介绍,即可将相关描述中PUSCH的调度跳频带宽替换为对应的PUSCH的跳频带宽即可,此处不再重复赘述。例如,根据PUSCH的跳频带宽1对应的SRS资源的跳频带宽划分每个PRG时,可将上述相关描述中的PUSCH的调度跳频带宽替换为PUSCH的跳频带宽1即可;再比如,根据PUSCH的跳频带宽2对应的SRS资源的同一跳频带宽时,还可进一步根据SRI字段指示的SRS资源划分出每个PRG时,即可将上述相关描述中的PUSCH的调度跳频带宽替换为PUSCH的跳频带宽2即可。也就是说,终端设备还可接收来自网络设备的第一信息和第二信息,所述第一信息用于指示SRS资源的跳频带宽,所述第二信息用于指示所述SRS资源中部分或者全部SRS资源的索引。Further, optionally, the terminal device may also determine the PRG according to the frequency hopping bandwidth of the SRS resource and the index of the SRS resource indicated by the network device. That is, the terminal device can first divide the scheduling bandwidth of the PUSCH into multiple PRG sets according to the frequency hopping bandwidth of the PUSCH. With reference to FIG. 9 , the terminal device can divide the scheduling bandwidth of the PUSCH into two PRG sets, and for each PRG set , and further divide each PRG according to the frequency hopping bandwidth of the corresponding SRS resource and the SRS resource indicated by the SRI field. For the specific process, please refer to the above related introduction, that is, the scheduling frequency hopping bandwidth of the PUSCH in the related description can be replaced with the corresponding PUSCH The frequency hopping bandwidth is sufficient, and details are not repeated here. For example, when dividing each PRG according to the frequency hopping bandwidth of the SRS resource corresponding to the frequency hopping bandwidth 1 of the PUSCH, the scheduling frequency hopping bandwidth of the PUSCH in the above related description can be replaced with the frequency hopping bandwidth 1 of the PUSCH; for another example, According to the same frequency hopping bandwidth of the SRS resource corresponding to the frequency hopping bandwidth 2 of the PUSCH, when each PRG can be further divided according to the SRS resource indicated by the SRI field, the scheduling frequency hopping bandwidth of the PUSCH in the above related description can be replaced The frequency hopping bandwidth 2 of the PUSCH can be used. That is, the terminal device may also receive first information and second information from the network device, where the first information is used to indicate the frequency hopping bandwidth of the SRS resource, and the second information is used to indicate a part of the SRS resource Or the index of all SRS resources.
需要说明的是,确定M个PRG中每个PRG采用的波束赋形方式可分别参见前述相关介绍,可将相关描述中PUSCH的调度跳频带宽替换为PUSCH的跳频带宽即可,此处不再重复赘述。It should be noted that, to determine the beamforming mode adopted by each PRG in the M PRGs, please refer to the above-mentioned related introduction respectively, and the scheduling frequency hopping bandwidth of PUSCH in the related description can be replaced with the frequency hopping bandwidth of PUSCH, which is not required here. Repeat again.
步骤1004,终端设备根据每个跳频带宽对应的SRS资源的跳频带宽确定M个PRG中每个PRG对应的PUSCH的波束赋形方式。Step 1004, the terminal device determines the beamforming mode of the PUSCH corresponding to each PRG in the M PRGs according to the frequency hopping bandwidth of the SRS resource corresponding to each frequency hopping bandwidth.
该步骤1004为可选步骤。This step 1004 is an optional step.
此处,每个PRG对应的PUSCH的波束赋形方式,也可以理解为,在每个PRG上发送PUSCH的波束赋形方式。Here, the beamforming manner of the PUSCH corresponding to each PRG can also be understood as the beamforming manner of transmitting the PUSCH on each PRG.
以第七PRG为例介绍M个PRG中每个PRG上采用的波束赋形方式说明,第七PRG为M个PRG中的任一个。在一种可能的实现方式中,终端设备可确定第七PRG对应的SRS资源的第二跳频带宽,在第七PRG上发送PUSCH的波束赋形方式为发送第二SRS的波束赋形方式,其中,发送第二SRS的波束赋形方式为在SRS资源的第二跳频带宽上发送SRS采用的波束赋形方式。The seventh PRG is taken as an example to describe the beamforming mode adopted on each of the M PRGs, where the seventh PRG is any one of the M PRGs. In a possible implementation manner, the terminal device may determine the second frequency hopping bandwidth of the SRS resource corresponding to the seventh PRG, and the beamforming manner for sending the PUSCH on the seventh PRG is the beamforming manner for sending the second SRS, The beamforming manner for sending the second SRS is the beamforming manner used for transmitting the SRS on the second frequency hopping bandwidth of the SRS resource.
进一步,可选地,终端设备可根据SRI字段指示值(第二信息)确定第七PRG对应的SRS资源的索引,例如第二SRS资源,终端设备可确定第七PRG对应的SRS资源的第二跳频带宽,在第七PRG上发送PUSCH的波束赋形方式为发送第二SRS的波束赋形方式,其中,发送第二SRS的波束赋形方式为在第二SRS资源的第二跳频带宽上发送SRS采用 的波束赋形方式。Further, optionally, the terminal device may determine the index of the SRS resource corresponding to the seventh PRG according to the SRI field indication value (second information), for example, the second SRS resource, and the terminal device may determine the second SRS resource corresponding to the seventh PRG Frequency hopping bandwidth, the beamforming mode for sending the PUSCH on the seventh PRG is the beamforming mode for sending the second SRS, wherein the beamforming mode for sending the second SRS is the second frequency hopping bandwidth of the second SRS resource The beamforming method used to transmit SRS on the
结合图9,第七PRG以PUSCH的跳频带宽1中的PRG1为例,PRG1对应的第二跳频带宽为:SRS资源0、SRS资源1、SRS资源2和SRS资源3在OFDM符号4的跳频带宽,进一步,PRG1对应第二信息指示的SRS资源的索引为0(称为SRS资源0),也就是说,在PRG0上发送PUSCH的波束赋形方式为:在SRS资源0上且在OFDM符号4对应的跳频带宽上发送第二SRS的波束赋形方式。9 , the seventh PRG takes PRG1 in frequency hopping bandwidth 1 of PUSCH as an example, and the second frequency hopping bandwidth corresponding to PRG1 is: SRS resource 0, SRS resource 1, SRS resource 2 and SRS resource 3 in OFDM symbol 4 Frequency hopping bandwidth, further, the index of PRG1 corresponding to the SRS resource indicated by the second information is 0 (referred to as SRS resource 0), that is to say, the beamforming mode for sending PUSCH on PRG0 is: on SRS resource 0 and on A beamforming manner for sending the second SRS on the frequency hopping bandwidth corresponding to OFDM symbol 4.
需要说明的是,由于SRS资源配置可以是周期的,即,在不同周期内的同一个跳频带宽上可能均发送SRS,此时,对于PUSCH的跳频带宽的一个PRG而言,可以对应多个波束赋形方式,每个波束赋形方式对应不同周期内的同一个SRS资源的同一个跳频带宽上发送SRS采用的波束赋形方式。此时,本申请对PRG采用的波束赋形方式做进一步限定,即:将第二SRS确定为与第二信息中携带的SRI指示信息发送时刻时间间隔最小的一次SRS发送周期上的SRS。终端设备根据该周期上的相应SRS采用的波束赋形方式确定PUSCH的PRG所采用的波束赋形方式。It should be noted that since the SRS resource configuration can be periodic, that is, SRS may be sent on the same frequency hopping bandwidth in different periods. There are several beamforming modes, and each beamforming mode corresponds to the beamforming mode adopted for sending SRS on the same frequency hopping bandwidth of the same SRS resource in different periods. At this time, the present application further defines the beamforming mode adopted by the PRG, that is, the second SRS is determined as the SRS in the first SRS transmission period with the smallest time interval from the transmission moment of the SRI indication information carried in the second information. The terminal device determines the beamforming mode adopted by the PRG of the PUSCH according to the beamforming mode adopted by the corresponding SRS in the period.
步骤1005,终端设备根据M个PRG发送PUSCH。Step 1005, the terminal device sends the PUSCH according to the M PRGs.
该步骤1005可参见上述步骤1105的介绍,此处不再重复赘述。For this step 1005, reference may be made to the introduction of the above-mentioned step 1105, which will not be repeated here.
从上述步骤1001至步骤1005可以看出,终端设备可根据第三信息确定PUSCH的调度带宽对应的M个PRG,如此,可以确保每个PRG的波束赋形方式较优,且PUSCH可以获得频率分集增益。It can be seen from the above steps 1001 to 1005 that the terminal device can determine the M PRGs corresponding to the scheduling bandwidth of the PUSCH according to the third information. In this way, it can ensure that the beamforming mode of each PRG is better, and the PUSCH can obtain frequency diversity gain.
在一种可能的实现方式中,当所述PUSCH的传输层数等于L,所述第二指示信息指示的所述SRS资源的数量为H,所述PUSCH的跳频带宽对应的SRS资源的跳频带宽的数量为P,所述PUSCH的一个跳频带宽对应的PRG的数量满足H×P/L,所述H、P和L均为正整数。其中,PUSCH的传输层数L可以是终端设备根据网络设备发送的第二信息确定的,或者是协议预先约定的,具体参见前述PUSCH的传输层数的介绍,即将上述PUSCH的调度带宽替换为PUSCH的跳频带宽,此处不再重复赘述。In a possible implementation manner, when the number of transmission layers of the PUSCH is equal to L, the number of the SRS resources indicated by the second indication information is H, and the hopping frequency of the SRS resources corresponding to the frequency hopping bandwidth of the PUSCH is H. The number of frequency bandwidths is P, the number of PRGs corresponding to one frequency hopping bandwidth of the PUSCH satisfies H×P/L, and the H, P and L are all positive integers. The number of transmission layers L of PUSCH may be determined by the terminal device according to the second information sent by the network device, or pre-agreed by the protocol. For details, please refer to the introduction of the number of transmission layers of PUSCH, that is, to replace the scheduling bandwidth of PUSCH with PUSCH The frequency hopping bandwidth is not repeated here.
结合上述图9,以指示的一个SRS资源对应一个PUSCH的传输层为例(即L=1),PUSCH的跳频带宽1与SRS资源的两个跳频带宽重叠,即PUSCH的跳频带宽1内包括的SRS资源的跳频带宽的数量为2,则P=2;SRI字段指示值=0,则H=1;因此,PUSCH的跳频带宽1包括的PRG的数量满足H×P/L=1×2/1=2。PUSCH的跳频带宽2与SRS资源的一个跳频带宽重叠,即PUSCH的跳频带宽2内包括的SRS资源的跳频带宽的数量为1,则P=1;SRI字段指示值=0&1,则H=2,因此,PUSCH的跳频带宽2包括的PRG的数量满足H×P/L=2×1/1=2。With reference to the above FIG. 9 , taking the indicated SRS resource corresponding to the transmission layer of one PUSCH as an example (that is, L=1), the frequency hopping bandwidth 1 of the PUSCH overlaps with the two frequency hopping bandwidths of the SRS resource, that is, the frequency hopping bandwidth 1 of the PUSCH If the number of frequency hopping bandwidths of the SRS resources included is 2, then P=2; the SRI field indication value=0, then H=1; therefore, the number of PRGs included in the frequency hopping bandwidth 1 of the PUSCH satisfies H×P/L =1×2/1=2. Frequency hopping bandwidth 2 of PUSCH overlaps with a frequency hopping bandwidth of SRS resources, that is, the number of frequency hopping bandwidths of SRS resources included in frequency hopping bandwidth 2 of PUSCH is 1, then P=1; SRI field indication value=0&1, then H=2, therefore, the number of PRGs included in the frequency hopping bandwidth 2 of the PUSCH satisfies H×P/L=2×1/1=2.
可以理解的是,为了实现上述实施例中功能,网络设备和终端设备包括了执行各个功能相应的硬件结构和/或软件模块。本领域技术人员应该很容易意识到,结合本申请中所公开的实施例描述的各示例的模块及方法步骤,本申请能够以硬件或硬件和计算机软件相结合的形式来实现。某个功能究竟以硬件还是计算机软件驱动硬件的方式来执行,取决于技术方案的特定应用场景和设计约束条件。It can be understood that, in order to implement the functions in the foregoing embodiments, the network device and the terminal device include corresponding hardware structures and/or software modules for performing each function. Those skilled in the art should easily realize that the modules and method steps of each example described in conjunction with the embodiments disclosed in the present application can be implemented in the form of hardware or a combination of hardware and computer software. Whether a function is performed by hardware or computer software-driven hardware depends on the specific application scenarios and design constraints of the technical solution.
基于上述内容和相同构思,图11和图12为本申请的提供的可能的通信装置的结构示意图。这些通信装置可以用于实现上述方法实施例中终端设备或网络设备的功能,因此也能实现上述方法实施例所具备的有益效果。在本申请中,该通信装置可以是如图1所示的 终端设备102,也可以是如图1所示的网络设备101,还可以是应用于终端设备或网络设备的模块(如芯片)。Based on the above content and the same concept, FIG. 11 and FIG. 12 are schematic structural diagrams of possible communication apparatuses provided by the present application. These communication apparatuses can be used to implement the functions of the terminal equipment or the network equipment in the above method embodiments, and thus can also achieve the beneficial effects of the above method embodiments. In this application, the communication device may be the terminal device 102 as shown in FIG. 1 , the network device 101 as shown in FIG. 1 , or a module (such as a chip) applied to the terminal device or the network device.
如图11所示,该通信装置1100包括处理模块1101和收发模块1102。通信装置1100用于实现上述图6或图10中所示的方法实施例中终端设备或网络设备的功能。As shown in FIG. 11 , the communication device 1100 includes a processing module 1101 and a transceiver module 1102 . The communication apparatus 1100 is configured to implement the functions of the terminal device or the network device in the method embodiment shown in FIG. 6 or FIG. 10 .
当通信装置1100用于实现图6所示的方法实施例的终端设备的功能时:收发模块1102用于接收来自第二通信装置的第一信息和第二信息,所述第一信息用于指示探测参考信号SRS资源的跳频带宽,所述第二信息用于指示所述SRS资源中部分或者全部SRS资源的索引;处理模块1101用于根据所述第一信息和所述第二信息,确定物理上行共享信道PUSCH的调度带宽对应的N个PRG,所述N为正整数;收发模块1102还用于根据所述N个PRG发送所述PUSCH。When the communication apparatus 1100 is used to implement the function of the terminal device in the method embodiment shown in FIG. 6 : the transceiver module 1102 is used to receive first information and second information from the second communication apparatus, where the first information is used to indicate The frequency hopping bandwidth of the sounding reference signal SRS resource, and the second information is used to indicate the index of some or all of the SRS resources in the SRS resource; the processing module 1101 is configured to determine according to the first information and the second information. N PRGs corresponding to the scheduling bandwidth of the physical uplink shared channel PUSCH, where N is a positive integer; the transceiver module 1102 is further configured to send the PUSCH according to the N PRGs.
当通信装置1100用于实现图6所示的方法实施例的网络设备的功能时:处理模块1101用于确定第一信息和第二信息,所述第一信息用于指示探测参考信号SRS资源的跳频带宽,所述第二信息用于指示所述SRS资源中部分或者全部SRS资源的索引;收发模块1102用于发送所述第一信息和所述第二信息,所述第一信息和所述第二信息用于确定物理上行共享信道PUSCH的调度带宽对应的N个PRG,所述N为正整数。When the communication apparatus 1100 is used to implement the function of the network device in the method embodiment shown in FIG. 6 : the processing module 1101 is used to determine first information and second information, where the first information is used to indicate a sounding reference signal SRS resource frequency hopping bandwidth, the second information is used to indicate the index of some or all of the SRS resources in the SRS resources; the transceiver module 1102 is used to send the first information and the second information, the first information and the The second information is used to determine N PRGs corresponding to the scheduling bandwidth of the physical uplink shared channel PUSCH, where N is a positive integer.
有关上述处理模块1101和收发模块1102更详细的描述可以参考图6所示的方法实施例中相关描述直接得到,此处不再一一赘述。More detailed descriptions of the above-mentioned processing module 1101 and the transceiver module 1102 can be obtained directly by referring to the relevant descriptions in the method embodiment shown in FIG. 6 , and details are not repeated here.
应理解,本申请实施例中的处理模块1101可以由处理器或处理器相关电路组件实现,收发模块1102可以由收发器或收发器相关电路组件实现。It should be understood that the processing module 1101 in this embodiment of the present application may be implemented by a processor or a circuit component related to the processor, and the transceiver module 1102 may be implemented by a transceiver or a circuit component related to the transceiver.
基于上述内容和相同构思,如图12所示,本申请还提供一种通信装置1200。该通信装置1200可包括处理器1201和收发器1202。处理器1201和收发器1202之间相互耦合。可以理解的是,收发器1202可以为接口电路或输入输出接口。可选地,通信装置1200还可包括存储器1203,用于存储处理器1201执行的指令或存储处理器1201运行指令所需要的输入数据或存储处理器1201运行指令后产生的数据。Based on the above content and the same concept, as shown in FIG. 12 , the present application further provides a communication apparatus 1200 . The communication device 1200 may include a processor 1201 and a transceiver 1202 . The processor 1201 and the transceiver 1202 are coupled to each other. It can be understood that the transceiver 1202 can be an interface circuit or an input-output interface. Optionally, the communication apparatus 1200 may further include a memory 1203 for storing instructions executed by the processor 1201 or input data required by the processor 1201 to execute the instructions or data generated after the processor 1201 executes the instructions.
当通信装置1200用于实现图6所示的方法时,处理器1201用于执行上述处理模块1101的功能,收发器1202用于执行上述收发模块1102的功能。When the communication apparatus 1200 is used to implement the method shown in FIG. 6 , the processor 1201 is used to execute the function of the above-mentioned processing module 1101 , and the transceiver 1202 is used to execute the function of the above-mentioned transceiver module 1102 .
当上述通信装置为应用于终端设备的芯片时,该终端设备芯片实现上述方法实施例中终端设备的功能。该终端设备芯片从终端设备中的其它模块(如射频模块或天线)接收信息,该信息是网络设备发送给终端设备的;或者,该终端设备芯片向终端设备中的其它模块(如射频模块或天线)发送信息,该信息是终端设备发送给网络设备的。When the above communication device is a chip applied to a terminal device, the terminal device chip implements the functions of the terminal device in the above method embodiments. The terminal device chip receives information from other modules (such as a radio frequency module or an antenna) in the terminal device, and the information is sent by the network device to the terminal device; or, the terminal device chip sends information to other modules (such as a radio frequency module or an antenna) in the terminal device antenna) to send information, the information is sent by the terminal equipment to the network equipment.
当上述通信装置为应用于网络设备的芯片时,该网络设备芯片实现上述方法实施例中网络设备的功能。该网络设备芯片从网络设备中的其它模块(如射频模块或天线)接收信息,该信息是终端设备发送给网络设备的;或者,该网络设备芯片向网络设备中的其它模块(如射频模块或天线)发送信息,该信息是网络设备发送给终端设备的。When the above communication device is a chip applied to a network device, the network device chip implements the functions of the network device in the above method embodiments. The network device chip receives information from other modules (such as a radio frequency module or an antenna) in the network device, and the information is sent by the terminal device to the network device; or, the network device chip sends information to other modules in the network device (such as a radio frequency module or an antenna). antenna) to send information, the information is sent by the network equipment to the terminal equipment.
当通信装置为终端设备时,图13示出了一种简化的终端设备的结构示意图。便于理解和图示方便,图13中,终端设备以手机为例。如图13所示,终端设备1300包括处理器、存储器、射频电路、天线以及输入输出装置。处理器主要用于对通信协议以及通信数据进行处理,以及对整个终端设备进行控制,执行软件程序,处理软件程序的数据,例如 用于支持终端设备1300执行上述任一实施例中由终端设备执行的方法。存储器主要用于存储软件程序和数据。射频电路主要用于基带信号与射频信号的转换以及对射频信号的处理。天线主要用于收发电磁波形式的射频信号。输入输出装置,例如触摸屏、显示屏,键盘等主要用于接收用户输入的数据以及对用户输出数据。需要说明的是,有些种类的终端设备可以不具有输入输出装置。When the communication device is a terminal device, FIG. 13 shows a schematic structural diagram of a simplified terminal device. For the convenience of understanding and illustration, in FIG. 13 , the terminal device is a mobile phone as an example. As shown in FIG. 13 , the terminal device 1300 includes a processor, a memory, a radio frequency circuit, an antenna, and an input and output device. The processor is mainly used to process the communication protocol and communication data, control the entire terminal device, execute software programs, and process data of the software programs, for example, to support the terminal device 1300 to execute any of the above-mentioned embodiments by the terminal device. Methods. The memory is mainly used to store software programs and data. The radio frequency circuit is mainly used for the conversion of the baseband signal and the radio frequency signal and the processing of the radio frequency signal. Antennas are mainly used to send and receive radio frequency signals in the form of electromagnetic waves. Input and output devices, such as touch screens, display screens, and keyboards, are mainly used to receive data input by users and output data to users. It should be noted that some types of terminal equipment may not have input and output devices.
当终端设备开机后,处理器可以读取存储器中的软件程序,解释并执行软件程序的指令,处理软件程序的数据。当需要通过发送数据时,处理器对待发送的数据进行基带处理后,输出基带信号至射频电路,射频电路将基带信号进行射频处理后将射频信号通过天线以电磁波的形式向外发送。当有数据发送到终端设备1300时,射频电路通过天线接收到射频信号,将射频信号转换为基带信号,并将基带信号输出至处理器,处理器将基带信号转换为数据并对该数据进行处理。When the terminal device is powered on, the processor can read the software program in the memory, interpret and execute the instructions of the software program, and process the data of the software program. When it is necessary to send data, the processor performs baseband processing on the data to be sent, and outputs the baseband signal to the radio frequency circuit. The radio frequency circuit performs radio frequency processing on the baseband signal and sends the radio frequency signal through the antenna in the form of electromagnetic waves. When data is sent to the terminal device 1300, the radio frequency circuit receives the radio frequency signal through the antenna, converts the radio frequency signal into a baseband signal, and outputs the baseband signal to the processor, which converts the baseband signal into data and processes the data .
作为一种可选的实现方式,处理器可以包括基带处理器和中央处理器,基带处理器主要用于对通信协议以及通信数据进行处理,中央处理器主要用于对整个终端设备1300进行控制,执行软件程序,处理软件程序的数据。图13中的处理器集成了基带处理器和中央处理器的功能,需要说明的是,基带处理器和中央处理器也可以是各自独立的处理器,通过总线等技术互联。另外,终端设备可以包括多个基带处理器以适应不同的网络制式,终端设备1300可以包括多个中央处理器以增强其处理能力,终端设备1300的各个部件可以通过各种总线连接。基带处理器也可以表述为基带处理电路或者基带处理芯片。中央处理器也可以表述为中央处理电路或者中央处理芯片。对通信协议以及通信数据进行处理的功能可以内置在处理器中,也可以以软件程序的形式存储在存储模块中,由处理器执行软件程序以实现基带处理功能。As an optional implementation manner, the processor may include a baseband processor and a central processing unit. The baseband processor is mainly used to process communication protocols and communication data, and the central processing unit is mainly used to control the entire terminal device 1300. The software program is executed, and the data of the software program is processed. The processor in FIG. 13 integrates the functions of the baseband processor and the central processing unit. It should be noted that the baseband processor and the central processing unit may also be independent processors, which are interconnected through technologies such as a bus. In addition, the terminal device may include multiple baseband processors to adapt to different network standards, the terminal device 1300 may include multiple central processors to enhance its processing capability, and various components of the terminal device 1300 may be connected through various buses. The baseband processor can also be expressed as a baseband processing circuit or a baseband processing chip. The central processing unit can also be expressed as a central processing circuit or a central processing chip. The function of processing the communication protocol and communication data may be built in the processor, or may be stored in the storage module in the form of a software program, and the processor executes the software program to realize the baseband processing function.
本申请中,可以将具有收发功能的天线和射频电路视为终端设备的收发模块,将具有处理功能的处理器视为终端设备的处理模块。如图13所示,终端设备包括处理模块1301和收发模块1302。收发模块也可以称为收发器、收发机、收发装置等,处理模块也可以称为处理器,处理单板,处理单元、处理装置等。可选地,可以将收发模块中用于实现接收功能的器件视为接收模块,将收发模块中用于实现发送功能的器件视为发送模块,即收发模块包括接收模块和发送模块示例性的,接收模块也可以称为接收机、接收器、接收电路等,发送模块可以称为发射机、发射器或者发射电路等。In this application, the antenna and radio frequency circuit with a transceiver function can be regarded as the transceiver module of the terminal equipment, and the processor with the processing function can be regarded as the processing module of the terminal equipment. As shown in FIG. 13 , the terminal device includes a processing module 1301 and a transceiver module 1302 . The transceiver module may also be referred to as a transceiver, a transceiver, a transceiver device, and the like, and the processing module may also be referred to as a processor, a processing board, a processing unit, a processing device, and the like. Optionally, the device used for implementing the receiving function in the transceiver module may be regarded as a receiving module, and the device used for implementing the transmitting function in the transceiver module may be regarded as a transmitting module, that is, the transceiver module includes a receiving module and a transmitting module. Exemplary, The receiving module may also be called a receiver, a receiver, a receiving circuit, and the like, and the sending module may be called a transmitter, a transmitter, or a transmitting circuit, and the like.
在下行链路上,通过天线接收网络设备发送的下行链路信号(包括数据和/或控制信息),在上行链路上,通过天线向网络设备或其它终端设备发送上行链路信号(包括数据和/或控制信息),在处理器中,对业务数据和信令消息进行处理,这些模块根据无线接入网采用的无线接入技术(例如,LTE、NR及其他演进系统的接入技术)来进行处理。处理器还用于对终端设备的动作进行控制管理,用于执行上述实施例中由终端设备进行的处理。处理器还用于支持终端设备执行图6中涉及终端设备的执行方法。On the downlink, the downlink signal (including data and/or control information) sent by the network device is received through the antenna, and on the uplink, the uplink signal (including data) is sent to the network device or other terminal equipment through the antenna. and/or control information), in the processor, the service data and signaling messages are processed, and these modules are based on the radio access technology adopted by the radio access network (for example, LTE, NR and other evolved system access technologies) to be processed. The processor is further configured to control and manage the actions of the terminal device, and to execute the processing performed by the terminal device in the above-mentioned embodiment. The processor is further configured to support the terminal device to execute the execution method involving the terminal device in FIG. 6 .
需要说明的是,图13仅示出了一个存储器、一个处理器和一个天线。在实际的终端设备中,终端设备可以包含任意数量的天线,存储器,处理器等。其中,存储器也可以称为存储介质或者存储设备等。另外,存储器可以是独立于处理器设置,也可以是与处理器集成在一起,本申请实施例对此不做限制。It should be noted that FIG. 13 only shows one memory, one processor and one antenna. In an actual terminal device, the terminal device may contain any number of antennas, memories, processors, and the like. The memory may also be referred to as a storage medium or a storage device or the like. In addition, the memory may be set independently of the processor, or may be integrated with the processor, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
应理解,收发模块1302用于执行上述图6所示的方法实施例中终端设备侧的发送操作和接收操作,处理模块1301用于执行上述图6所示的方法实施例中终端设备侧除了收 发操作之外的其他操作。例如,收发模块1302用于执行图6所示的实施例中的终端设备侧的收发步骤,例如步骤605。处理模块1301,用于执行图6所示的实施例中的终端设备侧除了收发操作之外的其他操作,例如步骤603、步骤604。It should be understood that the transceiver module 1302 is configured to perform the sending and receiving operations on the terminal device side in the method embodiment shown in FIG. 6 above, and the processing module 1301 is configured to perform the sending and receiving operations on the terminal device side in the method embodiment shown in FIG. 6 above. operations other than operations. For example, the transceiving module 1302 is configured to perform the transceiving steps on the terminal device side in the embodiment shown in FIG. 6 , such as step 605 . The processing module 1301 is configured to perform other operations on the side of the terminal device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 6 except for the transceiving operation, such as step 603 and step 604 .
当该通信装置为芯片类的装置或者电路时,该通信装置可包括收发模块和处理模块。其中,收发模块可以是输入输出电路和/或接口电路;处理模块可为该芯片上集成的处理器或者微处理器或者集成电路。When the communication device is a chip-type device or circuit, the communication device may include a transceiver module and a processing module. Wherein, the transceiver module may be an input/output circuit and/or an interface circuit; the processing module may be a processor, a microprocessor or an integrated circuit integrated on the chip.
当该通信装置为网络设备时,图14示例性示出了本申请提供的一种网络设备的结构示意图。如图14所示,该网络设备1400可包括一个或多个射频单元,如远端射频单元(remote radio unit,RRU)1402和一个或多个基带单元(baseband unit,BBU)1401。RRU1402可以称为收发模块、收发机、收发电路、或者收发器等等,其可以包括至少一个天线14021和射频单元14022。RRU1402部分主要用于射频信号的收发以及射频信号与基带信号的转换。BBU1401部分可以称为处理模块,处理器等,主要用于进行基带处理,如信道编码,复用,调制,扩频等,也用于对网络设备进行控制等。RRU1402与BBU1401可以是物理上设置在一起;也可以物理上分离设置的,即分布式网络设备。When the communication apparatus is a network device, FIG. 14 exemplarily shows a schematic structural diagram of a network device provided by the present application. As shown in FIG. 14 , the network device 1400 may include one or more radio frequency units, such as a remote radio unit (remote radio unit, RRU) 1402 and one or more baseband units (baseband unit, BBU) 1401. The RRU 1402 may be referred to as a transceiver module, a transceiver, a transceiver circuit, or a transceiver, etc., and may include at least one antenna 14021 and a radio frequency unit 14022 . The RRU1402 part is mainly used for the transceiver of radio frequency signals and the conversion of radio frequency signals and baseband signals. The BBU1401 part can be called a processing module, a processor, etc. It is mainly used for baseband processing, such as channel coding, multiplexing, modulation, spread spectrum, etc., and is also used to control network equipment. The RRU 1402 and the BBU 1401 may be physically set together; they may also be physically separated, that is, a distributed network device.
所述BBU 1401为基站的控制中心,也可以称为处理模块,可以与图12中的处理模块1201对应,主要用于完成基带处理功能,如信道编码,复用,调制,扩频等等。例如所述BBU(处理模块)可以用于控制基站执行上述方法实施例中关于网络设备的操作流程,例如,确定第一信息和第二信息等。The BBU 1401 is the control center of the base station, and can also be called a processing module, which can correspond to the processing module 1201 in FIG. 12 , and is mainly used to complete baseband processing functions, such as channel coding, multiplexing, modulation, spread spectrum, and the like. For example, the BBU (processing module) may be used to control the base station to perform the operation procedure of the network device in the above method embodiments, for example, to determine the first information and the second information.
作为一种可选的实现方式,BBU1401可以由一个或多个单板构成,多个单板可以共同支持单一接入制式的无线接入网(如LTE网),也可以分别支持不同接入制式的无线接入网(如LTE网,5G网或其他网)。BBU1401还包括存储器14012和处理器14011。存储器14012用以存储必要的指令和数据。处理器14011用于控制网络设备进行必要的动作,例如用于控制网络设备执行上述任一实施例中网络设备执行的方法。存储器14012和处理器14011可以服务于一个或多个单板。也就是说,可以每个单板上单独设置存储器和处理器。也可以是多个单板公用相同的存储器和处理器。此外每个单板上还设置有必要的电路。As an optional implementation, the BBU1401 can be composed of one or more boards. Multiple boards can jointly support a wireless access network (such as LTE network) of a single access standard, or can support different access standards respectively. wireless access network (such as LTE network, 5G network or other networks). The BBU 1401 also includes a memory 14012 and a processor 14011. Memory 14012 is used to store necessary instructions and data. The processor 14011 is configured to control the network device to perform necessary actions, for example, to control the network device to perform the method performed by the network device in any of the foregoing embodiments. Memory 14012 and processor 14011 may serve one or more single boards. That is to say, the memory and processor can be provided separately on each single board. It can also be that multiple boards share the same memory and processor. In addition, necessary circuits are also provided on each single board.
在上行链路上,通过天线14021接收终端设备发送的上行链路信号(包括数据等),在下行链路上,通过天线14021向终端设备发送下行链路信号(包括数据和/或控制信息),在处理器14011中,对业务数据和信令消息进行处理,这些模块根据无线接入网采用的无线接入技术(例如,LTE、NR及其他演进系统的接入技术)来进行处理。处理器14011还用于对网络设备的动作进行控制管理,用于执行上述实施例中由网络设备进行的处理。处理器14011还用于支持网络设备执行图6中网络设备执行的方法。On the uplink, the uplink signal (including data, etc.) sent by the terminal device is received through the antenna 14021, and on the downlink, the downlink signal (including data and/or control information) is sent to the terminal device through the antenna 14021. , in the processor 14011, the service data and signaling messages are processed, and these modules are processed according to the radio access technology adopted by the radio access network (eg, LTE, NR, and other access technologies of evolved systems). The processor 14011 is further configured to control and manage the actions of the network device, and is configured to execute the processing performed by the network device in the foregoing embodiments. The processor 14011 is further configured to support the network device to perform the method performed by the network device in FIG. 6 .
需要说明的是,图14仅仅示出了网络设备的简化设计。在实际应用中,网络设备可以包含任意数量的天线,存储器,处理器,射频单元,RRU,BBU等,而所有可以实现本申请的网络设备都在本申请的保护范围之内。It should be noted that FIG. 14 only shows a simplified design of the network device. In practical applications, a network device may include any number of antennas, memories, processors, radio frequency units, RRUs, BBUs, etc., and all network devices that can implement the present application are within the protection scope of the present application.
应理解,收发模块1402用于执行上述图6所示的方法实施例中网络设备侧的发送操作和接收操作,处理模块1401用于执行上述图6所示的方法实施例中网络设备侧除了收发操作之外的其他操作。例如,收发模块1402用于执行图6所示的实施例中的网络设备侧的收发步骤,例如步骤602。处理模块1401,用于执行图6所示的实施例中的网络设备侧除了收发操作之外的其他操作,例如步骤601。It should be understood that the transceiver module 1402 is configured to perform the sending and receiving operations on the network device side in the method embodiment shown in FIG. 6 above, and the processing module 1401 is configured to perform the network device side in the method embodiment shown in FIG. 6 above. operations other than operations. For example, the transceiving module 1402 is configured to perform transceiving steps on the network device side in the embodiment shown in FIG. 6 , such as step 602 . The processing module 1401 is configured to perform other operations on the network device side in the embodiment shown in FIG. 6 except for the transceiving operation, for example, step 601 .
可以理解的是,本申请的实施例中的处理器可以是中央处理单元(central processing unit,CPU),还可以是其它通用处理器、数字信号处理器(digital signal processor,DSP)、专用集成电路(application specific integrated circuit,ASIC)、现场可编程门阵列(field programmable gate array,FPGA)或者其它可编程逻辑器件、晶体管逻辑器件,硬件部件或者其任意组合。通用处理器可以是微处理器,也可以是任何常规的处理器。It can be understood that the processor in the embodiments of the present application may be a central processing unit (central processing unit, CPU), and may also be other general-purpose processors, digital signal processors (digital signal processors, DSP), application-specific integrated circuits (application specific integrated circuit, ASIC), field programmable gate array (field programmable gate array, FPGA) or other programmable logic devices, transistor logic devices, hardware components or any combination thereof. A general-purpose processor may be a microprocessor or any conventional processor.
本申请的实施例中的方法步骤可以通过硬件的方式来实现,也可以由处理器执行软件指令的方式来实现。软件指令可以由相应的软件模块组成,软件模块可以被存放于随机存取存储器(random access memory,RAM)、闪存、只读存储器(read-only memory,ROM)、可编程只读存储器(programmable ROM,PROM)、可擦除可编程只读存储器(erasable PROM,EPROM)、电可擦除可编程只读存储器(electrically EPROM,EEPROM)、寄存器、硬盘、移动硬盘、CD-ROM或者本领域熟知的任何其它形式的存储介质中。一种示例性的存储介质耦合至处理器,从而使处理器能够从该存储介质读取信息,且可向该存储介质写入信息。当然,存储介质也可以是处理器的组成部分。处理器和存储介质可以位于ASIC中。另外,该ASIC可以位于网络设备或终端设备中。当然,处理器和存储介质也可以作为分立组件存在于网络设备或终端设备中。The method steps in the embodiments of the present application may be implemented in a hardware manner, or may be implemented in a manner in which a processor executes software instructions. Software instructions can be composed of corresponding software modules, and software modules can be stored in random access memory (RAM), flash memory, read-only memory (ROM), programmable read-only memory (programmable ROM) , PROM), erasable programmable read-only memory (erasable PROM, EPROM), electrically erasable programmable read-only memory (electrically EPROM, EEPROM), registers, hard disks, removable hard disks, CD-ROMs or known in the art in any other form of storage medium. An exemplary storage medium is coupled to the processor, such that the processor can read information from, and write information to, the storage medium. Of course, the storage medium can also be an integral part of the processor. The processor and storage medium may reside in an ASIC. Alternatively, the ASIC may be located in a network device or in an end device. Of course, the processor and the storage medium may also exist in the network device or the terminal device as discrete components.
在上述实施例中,可以全部或部分地通过软件、硬件、固件或者其任意组合来实现。当使用软件实现时,可以全部或部分地以计算机程序产品的形式实现。所述计算机程序产品包括一个或多个计算机程序或指令。在计算机上加载和执行所述计算机程序或指令时,全部或部分地执行本申请实施例所述的流程或功能。所述计算机可以是通用计算机、专用计算机、计算机网络、网络设备、用户设备或者其它可编程装置。所述计算机程序或指令可以存储在计算机可读存储介质中,或者从一个计算机可读存储介质向另一个计算机可读存储介质传输,例如,所述计算机程序或指令可以从一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心通过有线或无线方式向另一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心进行传输。所述计算机可读存储介质可以是计算机能够存取的任何可用介质或者是集成一个或多个可用介质的服务器、数据中心等数据存储设备。所述可用介质可以是磁性介质,例如,软盘、硬盘、磁带;也可以是光介质,例如,数字视频光盘(digital video disc,DVD);还可以是半导体介质,例如,固态硬盘(solid state drive,SSD)。In the above-mentioned embodiments, it may be implemented in whole or in part by software, hardware, firmware or any combination thereof. When implemented in software, it can be implemented in whole or in part in the form of a computer program product. The computer program product includes one or more computer programs or instructions. When the computer program or instructions are loaded and executed on a computer, the processes or functions described in the embodiments of the present application are executed in whole or in part. The computer may be a general purpose computer, a special purpose computer, a computer network, network equipment, user equipment, or other programmable apparatus. The computer program or instructions may be stored in a computer-readable storage medium or transmitted from one computer-readable storage medium to another computer-readable storage medium, for example, the computer program or instructions may be downloaded from a website site, computer, A server or data center transmits by wire or wireless to another website site, computer, server or data center. The computer-readable storage medium may be any available medium that can be accessed by a computer, or a data storage device such as a server, data center, or the like that integrates one or more available media. The usable medium can be a magnetic medium, such as a floppy disk, a hard disk, and a magnetic tape; it can also be an optical medium, such as a digital video disc (DVD); it can also be a semiconductor medium, such as a solid state drive (solid state drive). , SSD).
在本申请的各个实施例中,如果没有特殊说明以及逻辑冲突,不同的实施例之间的术语和/或描述具有一致性、且可以相互引用,不同的实施例中的技术特征根据其内在的逻辑关系可以组合形成新的实施例。In the various embodiments of the present application, if there is no special description or logical conflict, the terms and/or descriptions between different embodiments are consistent and can be referred to each other, and the technical features in different embodiments are based on their inherent Logical relationships can be combined to form new embodiments.
本申请中,“至少一个”是指一个或者多个,“多个”是指两个或两个以上。“和/或”,描述关联对象的关联关系,表示可以存在三种关系,例如,A和/或B,可以表示:单独存在A,同时存在A和B,单独存在B的情况,其中A,B可以是单数或者复数。在本申请的文字描述中,字符“/”,一般表示前后关联对象是一种“或”的关系;在本申请的公式中,字符“/”,表示前后关联对象是一种“相除”的关系。另外,在本申请中,“示例性的”一词用于表示作例子、例证或说明。本申请中被描述为“示例”的任何实施例或设计方案不应被解释为比其它实施例或设计方案更优选或更具优势。或者可理解为,使用示例的一词旨在以具体方式呈现概念,并不对本申请构成限定。In this application, "at least one" means one or more, and "plurality" means two or more. "And/or", which describes the association relationship of the associated objects, indicates that there can be three kinds of relationships, for example, A and/or B, which can indicate: the existence of A alone, the existence of A and B at the same time, and the existence of B alone, where A, B can be singular or plural. In the text description of this application, the character "/" generally indicates that the related objects are a kind of "or" relationship; in the formula of this application, the character "/" indicates that the related objects are a kind of "division" Relationship. Also, in this application, the word "exemplary" is used to mean serving as an example, illustration, or illustration. Any embodiment or design described in this application as "exemplary" should not be construed as preferred or advantageous over other embodiments or designs. Alternatively, it can be understood that the use of the word example is intended to present concepts in a specific manner, and not to limit the application.
可以理解的是,在本申请的实施例中涉及的各种数字编号仅为描述方便进行的区分, 并不用来限制本申请的实施例的范围。上述各过程的序号的大小并不意味着执行顺序的先后,各过程的执行顺序应以其功能和内在逻辑确定。术语“第一”、“第二”等类似表述,是用于区别类似的对象,而不必用于描述特定的顺序或先后次序。此外,术语“包括”和“具有”以及他们的任何变形,意图在于覆盖不排他的包含,例如,包含了一系列步骤或模块。方法、系统、产品或设备不必限于清楚地列出的那些步骤或模块,而是可包括没有清楚地列出的或对于这些过程、方法、产品或设备固有的其它步骤或模块。It can be understood that, various numbers and numbers involved in the embodiments of the present application are only used to distinguish for convenience of description, and are not used to limit the scope of the embodiments of the present application. The size of the sequence numbers of the above processes does not imply the sequence of execution, and the execution sequence of each process should be determined by its function and internal logic. The terms "first", "second" and similar expressions are used to distinguish similar objects and are not necessarily used to describe a specific order or sequence. Furthermore, the terms "comprising" and "having", and any variations thereof, are intended to cover non-exclusive inclusion, eg, comprising a series of steps or modules. A method, system, product or device is not necessarily limited to those steps or modules expressly listed, but may include other steps or modules not expressly listed or inherent to the process, method, product or device.
显然,本领域的技术人员可以对本申请进行各种改动和变型而不脱离本申请的保护范围。这样,倘若本申请的这些修改和变型属于本申请权利要求及其等同技术的范围之内,则本申请也意图包含这些改动和变型在内。Obviously, those skilled in the art can make various changes and modifications to the present application without departing from the protection scope of the present application. Thus, if these modifications and variations of the present application fall within the scope of the claims of the present application and their equivalents, the present application is also intended to include these modifications and variations.

Claims (21)

  1. 一种通信方法,其特征在于,包括:A communication method, comprising:
    第一通信装置接收来自第二通信装置的第一信息和第二信息,所述第一信息用于指示探测参考信号SRS资源的跳频带宽,所述第二信息用于指示所述SRS资源中部分或者全部SRS资源的索引;The first communication device receives first information and second information from the second communication device, where the first information is used to indicate the frequency hopping bandwidth of the sounding reference signal SRS resource, and the second information is used to indicate that the SRS resource is in the SRS resource. an index of some or all of the SRS resources;
    所述第一通信装置根据所述第一信息和所述第二信息,确定物理上行共享信道PUSCH的调度带宽对应的N个预编码资源块组PRG,所述N为正整数;The first communication device determines, according to the first information and the second information, N precoding resource block groups PRG corresponding to the scheduling bandwidth of the physical uplink shared channel PUSCH, where N is a positive integer;
    所述第一通信装置根据所述N个PRG发送所述PUSCH。The first communication apparatus transmits the PUSCH according to the N PRGs.
  2. 如权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,所述N个PRG中每个PRG对应所述SRS资源的一个跳频带宽。The method of claim 1, wherein each PRG in the N PRGs corresponds to a frequency hopping bandwidth of the SRS resource.
  3. 如权利要求1或2所述的方法,其特征在于,第一PRG中频率最低的PRB与第二PRG中频率最高的PRB分别对应所述SRS资源的不同跳频带宽;The method according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the PRB with the lowest frequency in the first PRG and the PRB with the highest frequency in the second PRG respectively correspond to different frequency hopping bandwidths of the SRS resource;
    其中,所述第一PRG和所述第二PRG为所述N个PRG中频域上相邻的两个PRG,所述第一PRG中频率最低的PRB与所述第二PRG中频率最高的PRB为所述PUSCH的调度带宽上相邻的两个PRB。The first PRG and the second PRG are two adjacent PRGs in the frequency domain among the N PRGs, the PRB with the lowest frequency in the first PRG and the PRB with the highest frequency in the second PRG are two adjacent PRBs on the scheduling bandwidth of the PUSCH.
  4. 如权利要求1或2所述的方法,其特征在于,第一PRG中频率最高的PRB与第二PRG中频率最低的PRB分别对应所述SRS资源的不同跳频带宽;The method according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the PRB with the highest frequency in the first PRG and the PRB with the lowest frequency in the second PRG respectively correspond to different frequency hopping bandwidths of the SRS resource;
    其中,所述第一PRG和所述第二PRG为所述N个PRG中频域上相邻的两个PRG,所述第一PRG中频率最高的PRB与所述第二PRG中频率最低的PRB为所述PUSCH的调度带宽上相邻的两个PRB。The first PRG and the second PRG are two adjacent PRGs in the frequency domain among the N PRGs, and the PRB with the highest frequency in the first PRG and the PRB with the lowest frequency in the second PRG are two adjacent PRBs on the scheduling bandwidth of the PUSCH.
  5. 如权利要求1至4任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,第三PRG和第四PRG对应所述SRS资源的同一个跳频带宽,且所述第三PRG和所述第四PRG对应所述第二信息指示的SRS资源的索引不同;The method according to any one of claims 1 to 4, wherein the third PRG and the fourth PRG correspond to the same frequency hopping bandwidth of the SRS resource, and the third PRG and the fourth PRG correspond to The indices of the SRS resources indicated by the second information are different;
    其中,所述第三PRG和所述第四PRG为所述N个PRG中任意两个PRG。Wherein, the third PRG and the fourth PRG are any two PRGs among the N PRGs.
  6. 如权利要求1至5任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 1 to 5, wherein the method further comprises:
    所述第一通信装置确定第五PRG对应的所述SRS资源的第一跳频带宽,在所述第五PRG上发送所述PUSCH的波束赋形方式为发送第一SRS的波束赋形方式,其中,所述第五PRG为所述N个PRG中的任一个;The first communication device determines the first frequency hopping bandwidth of the SRS resource corresponding to the fifth PRG, and the beamforming mode for transmitting the PUSCH on the fifth PRG is the beamforming mode for transmitting the first SRS, Wherein, the fifth PRG is any one of the N PRGs;
    所述第一SRS承载于第一SRS资源的第一跳频带宽上,所述第一SRS资源的索引为所述第二信息指示的部分或全部SRS的资源索引。The first SRS is carried on the first frequency hopping bandwidth of the first SRS resource, and the index of the first SRS resource is the resource index of part or all of the SRS indicated by the second information.
  7. 如权利要求6所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一SRS的传输为与发送所述第二信息的时域间隔最小的一次SRS传输。The method according to claim 6, wherein the transmission of the first SRS is an SRS transmission with the smallest time domain interval from sending the second information.
  8. 如权利要求1至7任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第二信息包括探测参考信号指示SRI。The method according to any one of claims 1 to 7, wherein the second information comprises a sounding reference signal indication SRI.
  9. 如权利要求1至8任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,当所述PUSCH的传输层数等于L,所述N满足H×K/L,所述H为所述第二指示信息指示的所述SRS资源的数量,所述K为所述PUSCH的调度带宽对应的SRS资源的跳频带宽的数量,所述H、K和L均为正整数。The method according to any one of claims 1 to 8, wherein when the number of transmission layers of the PUSCH is equal to L, the N satisfies H×K/L, and the H is an indication of the second indication information The number of the SRS resources, the K is the number of frequency hopping bandwidths of the SRS resources corresponding to the scheduling bandwidth of the PUSCH, and the H, K and L are all positive integers.
  10. 一种通信装置,其特征在于,包括:A communication device, comprising:
    收发模块,用于接收来自第二通信装置的第一信息和第二信息,所述第一信息用于指示探测参考信号SRS资源的跳频带宽,所述第二信息用于指示所述SRS资源中部分或者全部SRS资源的索引;a transceiver module, configured to receive first information and second information from a second communication device, where the first information is used to indicate a frequency hopping bandwidth of a sounding reference signal SRS resource, and the second information is used to indicate the SRS resource The index of some or all of the SRS resources in the middle;
    处理模块,用于根据所述第一信息和所述第二信息,确定物理上行共享信道PUSCH的调度带宽对应的N个预编码资源块组PRG,所述N为正整数a processing module, configured to determine, according to the first information and the second information, N precoding resource block groups PRG corresponding to the scheduling bandwidth of the physical uplink shared channel PUSCH, where N is a positive integer
    所述收发模块,还用于根据所述N个PRG发送所述PUSCH。The transceiver module is further configured to send the PUSCH according to the N PRGs.
  11. 如权利要求10所述的通信装置,其特征在于,所述N个PRG中每个PRG对应所述SRS资源的一个跳频带宽。The communication apparatus according to claim 10, wherein each PRG in the N PRGs corresponds to a frequency hopping bandwidth of the SRS resource.
  12. 如权利要求10或11所述的通信装置,其特征在于,第一PRG中频率最低的PRB与第二PRG中频率最高的PRB分别对应所述SRS资源的不同跳频带宽;The communication device according to claim 10 or 11, wherein the PRB with the lowest frequency in the first PRG and the PRB with the highest frequency in the second PRG respectively correspond to different frequency hopping bandwidths of the SRS resource;
    其中,所述第一PRG和所述第二PRG为所述N个PRG中频域上相邻的两个PRG,所述第一PRG中频率最低的PRB与所述第二PRG中频率最高的PRB为所述PUSCH的调度带宽上相邻的两个PRB。The first PRG and the second PRG are two adjacent PRGs in the frequency domain among the N PRGs, the PRB with the lowest frequency in the first PRG and the PRB with the highest frequency in the second PRG are two adjacent PRBs on the scheduling bandwidth of the PUSCH.
  13. 如权利要求10或11所述的通信装置,其特征在于,第一PRG中频率最高的PRB与第二PRG中频率最低的PRB分别对应所述SRS资源的不同跳频带宽;The communication device according to claim 10 or 11, wherein the PRB with the highest frequency in the first PRG and the PRB with the lowest frequency in the second PRG respectively correspond to different frequency hopping bandwidths of the SRS resource;
    其中,所述第一PRG和所述第二PRG为所述N个PRG中频域上相邻的两个PRG,所述第一PRG中频率最高的PRB与所述第二PRG中频率最低的PRB为所述PUSCH的调度带宽上相邻的两个PRB。The first PRG and the second PRG are two adjacent PRGs in the frequency domain among the N PRGs, and the PRB with the highest frequency in the first PRG and the PRB with the lowest frequency in the second PRG are two adjacent PRBs on the scheduling bandwidth of the PUSCH.
  14. 如权利要求10至13任一项所述的通信装置,其特征在于,第三PRG和第四PRG对应所述SRS资源的同一个跳频带宽,且所述第三PRG和所述第四PRG对应所述第二信息指示的SRS资源的索引不同;The communication device according to any one of claims 10 to 13, wherein the third PRG and the fourth PRG correspond to the same frequency hopping bandwidth of the SRS resource, and the third PRG and the fourth PRG The indices corresponding to the SRS resources indicated by the second information are different;
    其中,所述第三PRG和所述第四PRG为所述N个PRG中任意两个PRG。Wherein, the third PRG and the fourth PRG are any two PRGs among the N PRGs.
  15. 如权利要求10至14任一项所述的通信装置,其特征在于,所述通信装置处理模块,还用于:The communication device according to any one of claims 10 to 14, wherein the communication device processing module is further configured to:
    确定第五PRG对应的所述SRS资源的第一跳频带宽,在所述第五PRG上发送所述PUSCH的波束赋形方式为发送第一SRS的波束赋形方式,其中,所述第五PRG为所述N个PRG中的任一个;Determine the first frequency hopping bandwidth of the SRS resource corresponding to the fifth PRG, and the beamforming mode for sending the PUSCH on the fifth PRG is the beamforming mode for sending the first SRS, wherein the fifth PRG PRG is any one of the N PRGs;
    所述第一SRS承载于第一SRS资源的第一跳频带宽上,所述第一SRS资源的索引为所述第二信息指示的部分或全部SRS的资源索引。The first SRS is carried on the first frequency hopping bandwidth of the first SRS resource, and the index of the first SRS resource is the resource index of part or all of the SRS indicated by the second information.
  16. 如权利要求15所述的通信装置,其特征在于,所述第一SRS的传输为与发送所述第二信息的时域间隔最小的一次SRS传输。The communication apparatus according to claim 15, wherein the transmission of the first SRS is an SRS transmission with the smallest time domain interval from sending the second information.
  17. 如权利要求10至16任一项所述的通信装置,其特征在于,所述第二信息包括探测参考信号指示SRI。The communication apparatus according to any one of claims 10 to 16, wherein the second information comprises a sounding reference signal indication SRI.
  18. 如权利要求10至17任一项所述的通信装置,其特征在于,当所述PUSCH的传输层数等于L,所述N满足H×K/L,所述H为所述第二指示信息指示的所述SRS资源的数量,所述K为所述PUSCH的调度带宽对应的SRS资源的跳频带宽的数量,所述H、K和L均为正整数。The communication device according to any one of claims 10 to 17, wherein when the number of transmission layers of the PUSCH is equal to L, the N satisfies H×K/L, and the H is the second indication information The indicated number of the SRS resources, the K is the number of frequency hopping bandwidths of the SRS resources corresponding to the scheduling bandwidth of the PUSCH, and the H, K and L are all positive integers.
  19. 一种通信装置,其特征在于,包括处理器和收发器,所述收发器用于接收来自所述通信装置之外的其它通信装置的信号并传输至所述处理器或将来自所述处理器的信号发送给所述通信装置之外的其它通信装置,所述处理器通过逻辑电路或执行代码指令用于 实现如权利要求1至9中任一项所述的方法。A communication device, characterized in that it includes a processor and a transceiver, and the transceiver is configured to receive signals from other communication devices other than the communication device and transmit to the processor or transmit signals from the processor. The signal is sent to other communication devices than the communication device, and the processor is used to implement the method according to any one of claims 1 to 9 by means of logic circuits or executing code instructions.
  20. 一种计算机可读存储介质,其特征在于,所述计算机可读存储介质中存储有计算机程序或指令,当所述计算机程序或指令被通信装置执行时,使得所述通信装置执行如权利要求1至9中任一项所述的方法。A computer-readable storage medium, characterized in that, the computer-readable storage medium stores a computer program or instruction, and when the computer program or instruction is executed by a communication device, the communication device is made to perform as claimed in claim 1. The method of any one of to 9.
  21. 一种计算机程序产品,其特征在于,所述计算机程序产品包括计算机程序或指令,当所述计算机程序或指令被通信装置执行时,使得所述通信装置执行如权利要求1至9中任一项所述的方法。A computer program product, characterized in that the computer program product includes a computer program or instruction, which, when the computer program or instruction is executed by a communication device, causes the communication device to execute any one of claims 1 to 9 the method described.
PCT/CN2021/112454 2020-08-13 2021-08-13 Communication method and apparatus WO2022033577A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN202010811997.4 2020-08-13
CN202010811997.4A CN114079490A (en) 2020-08-13 2020-08-13 Communication method and device

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2022033577A1 true WO2022033577A1 (en) 2022-02-17

Family

ID=80247715

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2021/112454 WO2022033577A1 (en) 2020-08-13 2021-08-13 Communication method and apparatus

Country Status (2)

Country Link
CN (1) CN114079490A (en)
WO (1) WO2022033577A1 (en)

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20220061099A1 (en) * 2020-08-19 2022-02-24 Qualcomm Incorporated Synchronization signal block to physical random access channel mapping with multiple resource block sets

Families Citing this family (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2023206578A1 (en) * 2022-04-29 2023-11-02 Qualcomm Incorporated Managing selection of transmission reception points

Citations (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20170111898A1 (en) * 2012-08-03 2017-04-20 Intel Corporation Periodic channel state information (csi) reporting using a physical uplink control channel (pucch)
CN108809578A (en) * 2017-05-05 2018-11-13 华为技术有限公司 Method, terminal device and the network equipment of transmission data
US20190393946A1 (en) * 2016-09-21 2019-12-26 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Method and apparatus for beam management reference signals in wireless communication systems
CN110891312A (en) * 2018-09-10 2020-03-17 华为技术有限公司 Information sending method, information receiving method and device
CN111344999A (en) * 2017-11-17 2020-06-26 瑞典爱立信有限公司 Systems and methods relating to frequency selective SRS transmission and PUSCH precoding

Patent Citations (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20170111898A1 (en) * 2012-08-03 2017-04-20 Intel Corporation Periodic channel state information (csi) reporting using a physical uplink control channel (pucch)
US20190393946A1 (en) * 2016-09-21 2019-12-26 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Method and apparatus for beam management reference signals in wireless communication systems
CN108809578A (en) * 2017-05-05 2018-11-13 华为技术有限公司 Method, terminal device and the network equipment of transmission data
CN111344999A (en) * 2017-11-17 2020-06-26 瑞典爱立信有限公司 Systems and methods relating to frequency selective SRS transmission and PUSCH precoding
CN110891312A (en) * 2018-09-10 2020-03-17 华为技术有限公司 Information sending method, information receiving method and device

Non-Patent Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
NTT DOCOMO, INC.: "Work plan for Rel-15 NR WI", 3GPP DRAFT; R1-1718177 RAN1 WORK PLAN FOR NR, 3RD GENERATION PARTNERSHIP PROJECT (3GPP), MOBILE COMPETENCE CENTRE ; 650, ROUTE DES LUCIOLES ; F-06921 SOPHIA-ANTIPOLIS CEDEX ; FRANCE, vol. RAN WG1, no. Prague, CZ; 20171009 - 20171013, 8 October 2017 (2017-10-08), Mobile Competence Centre ; 650, route des Lucioles ; F-06921 Sophia-Antipolis Cedex ; France , XP051341359 *

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20220061099A1 (en) * 2020-08-19 2022-02-24 Qualcomm Incorporated Synchronization signal block to physical random access channel mapping with multiple resource block sets

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN114079490A (en) 2022-02-22

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
CN111295847B (en) Method, device and system for transmitting and receiving signals
CN111510267B (en) Method and communication device for beam indication
WO2018141272A1 (en) Terminal, network device and communication method
WO2019029662A1 (en) Information transmission method and communication device
CN111385042B (en) Method and communication device for interference measurement
US10778472B2 (en) Opportunistic measurement and feedback in a wireless local area network
US10531469B2 (en) Apparatus and method for supporting mixed numerology in wireless communication system
WO2022033577A1 (en) Communication method and apparatus
CN110475355A (en) A kind of method, apparatus and system of wave beam training
CN111867086B (en) Communication method and communication device
US20210250206A1 (en) Information Receiving Method and Apparatus and Information Sending Method and Apparatus
CN114826525A (en) Method and device for sending and receiving indication
CN114007262A (en) Communication method and device
WO2022082689A1 (en) Signal transmission method and device
US20220416856A1 (en) Information sending method and apparatus, and information receiving method and apparatus
WO2021163899A1 (en) Method for transmitting data by physical uplink shared channel, method for transmitting data, terminal, network device, and chip system
CN112821929A (en) CSI measuring method and device
US11817928B2 (en) Method and apparatus for channel estimation for OFDM based single carrier system
JP2013533650A (en) PUCCH spatial frequency block coding
CN116325877A (en) Channel state information reporting method and device
CN114846880A (en) Method and apparatus for enhanced Sounding Reference Signal (SRS) transmission signaling
CN110475352A (en) A kind of reference signal transmission method and communication equipment
WO2023151564A1 (en) Communication method, apparatus and system
WO2023024967A1 (en) Resource configuration method and apparatus
US11677452B2 (en) Method and apparatus for transmitting and receiving signal for terminal-centric cooperative transmission

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 21855627

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 21855627

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1